Please read the Operation Guide before using the copier Keep it close to the copier for easy reference

Transcription

1 * The above illustration includes the optional original cover. Please read the Operation Guide before using the copier Keep it close to the copier for easy reference

2 <IMPORTANT> The instructions contained herein are based on the 0 cpm (copies-per-minute) 05 copier, the 0 cpm 05 copier and the 50 cpm 505 copier. : This Operation Guide contains information that corresponds to using both the inch and metric versions of this copier. Within the text we have generally indicated messages by listing that for the inch version followed, in brackets, by the corresponding information for the metric version. However, when a message is essentially the same, or when the difference is only one of upper- and lower-case spelling, we have listed the information specifically as it is displayed in the inch version of this machine. All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the Publisher. Legal Restriction ing It may be prohibited to copy copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner. It is prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign currencies. ing other items may be prohibited.

3 Introduction to this Operation Guide The explanations contained in this Operation Guide have been separated into different sections in order to allow even those using a copier for the first time to use this machine efficiently, properly and with relative ease. A basic introduction to each section can be found below for reference. Refer to the related section when using this copier. Section IMPORTANT! PLEASE READ FIRST. This section contains explanations on information that is necessary for you to know prior to using this copier for the first time after purchase. For example, it contains notes and cautions on installation and operation that should be strictly obeyed in order to ensure its safe and proper operation. Section NAMES OF PARTS This section contains explanations on the names and functions of the parts of the copier and its operation panel. Section PREPARATIONS This section contains explanations on procedures for loading copy paper. Section BASIC OPERATION This section contains explanations on the basic procedures required to make simple copies. Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS This section contains explanations on using the various convenient functions of this copier. Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS This section contains explanations on the procedures for registering frequently used business forms and documents on the optional Hard Disk, printing them out when desired, and managing printing conditions. Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT This section contains explanations on the procedures for changing the various settings available for adjusting the copier to fit your copy needs and on the procedures for managing copy us. Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT This section contains explanations on the optional equipment that are available for use with this copier. Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING This section contains explanations on handling problems that may occur during operation of this copier, such as when an error indication appears or if a paper jam occurs. Section 0 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION This section contains explanations on maintaining the copier in proper condition and on replacing the toner container, as well as information on the specifications for this copier. i

4 CONTENTS Section IMPORTANT! PLEASE READ FIRST... - CAUTION LABELS... - INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS... - PRECAUTIONS FOR USE... - Section NAMES OF PARTS Main body Operation panel Touch panel Section PREPARATIONS Loading paper... - () Note when adding paper... - () Loading paper into the drawer[cassette]... - () Loading paper into the multi-bypass tray... - Section BASIC OPERATION Basic copying procedure Enlarging/reducing the copy image () magnification selection mode () Zoom mode () Preset zoom mode () XY zoom mode Interrupt copying Job reservation Energy-saving modes... - Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS Making -sided copies from various types of originals [-sided copy modes] () Making -sided copies from a -sided original () Making -sided copies from an open-faced (books, etc.) original () Making -sided copies from one-sided originals ing two-page originals onto separate sheets [Page separation/split copy modes] () Page separation/split copy from book originals () Page separation/split copy from -sided originals Making a margin space on the copies [Margin mode] () Standard margin () Separate front and back margin settings Adding a space next to the copy images for making notes [Memo mode] Making copies with clean edges [Border erase modes] () Erasing blemishes from edges of copies (Sheet erase mode) () Erasing blemishes from the edges and middle of copies made from books (Book erase mode) () Erasing blemishes from the edges of copies using individual border settings (Individual border erase mode) Fitting the image of either two or four originals onto a single copy page [Combine/Merge modes] () in () in ing page numbers on copies [ page numbers mode] Overlaying one image over another [Form overlay mode] Making booklets from sheet originals [Booklet/Stitching mode] Making booklets from book originals [Book to Booklet mode] matic sorting of copy sets without the Finisher [Sort/Finished mode] rotation function Adding a front and/or back cover to your copy sets [Cover mode] Original size selection mode Feeding paper as a backing sheet for OHP transparencies [Transparency + backing sheet mode] Inverting black and white [Invert mode] Making mirror image copies [Mirror image mode] Making a test copy prior to large volume copying [Proof mode] Making more of the same copies after a copy job is finished [Repeat copy mode] () ing a copy job for repeat copying () ing out with the repeat copy mode ing a large volume of originals in one operation [Batch scanning mode] Saving on toner use [Eco print mode] Original set direction Memorizing frequently used settings [Program function] () ing a program () Using programmed settings to make copies () Changing a registered program name () Deleting a registered program Registration keys () ing a function or mode under a function key () Deleting a registration key Easily add covers and insert sheets between various sets of originals in one operation [Job build mode] () Using the job build mode () ing the settings and functions Centering the copy image [Centering/Image shift mode] ii

5 CONTENTS Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS management functions () What are the document management functions? () Form registration () Shared data box () Synergy print boxes Output management functions () What are the output management functions? () Display of the output management functions () The status screen Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 7-. management mode () management procedures () Accessing the copy management menu screen () Editing copy management information () Checking the copy management counts (5) Turning the copy management function ON/OFF (6) Changing the copy management settings (7) Making copies when copy management is turned ON s () Machine settings () Accessing the machine settings () Making machine settings () settings (5) Accessing the copy settings (6) Making copy settings Multi-bypass tray paper settings () and type () ing other standard sizes Original size registration Drum refresh Checking the total counter and printing out the counter report Box management settings () Box settings () Accessing the box management settings () Making box management settings Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT () Processor () Paper Feeder () Paper Feeder () Finisher (5) Finisher (6) Finisher (7) Built-in Finisher (8) Job Separator (9) Hard Disk (0) Key () Tray () er Kit () er/scanner Kit () Fax Kit Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING If one of the following messages is displayed If one of these indicators lights or flashes When paper misfeeds () Cautions () Removal procedures If other trouble occurs Section 0 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION Cleaning the copier Replacing the toner container and waste toner box Specifications Environmental Specifications Installing the optional equipment Appendix: Functions and settings combination chart Hard disk management Report print out Changing the language used for messages Entering characters () Character input screens () Character input procedure iii

6 MAKING FULL USE OF THE COPIER'S ADVANCED FUNCTIONS Having the copier automatically select copy paper of the same size as the original < paper selection mode> (Page -) Making clear reproductions of photographs <Image quality selection> (Page -) abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abc defghi jkmn Various functions for making enlarged and reduced copies Enlarging/reducing the copy image to fit the size of paper in a specified drawer[cassette] < magnification selection mode> (Page -5) 8 /" " (A) " 7" (A) 9% (%) 5 /" 8 /" (A5) 6% (70%) Enlarging/reducing the copy image to a desired size between 5% and 00% <Zoom mode> (Page -6) e-touch selection of the copy magnification ratio <Preset zoom mode> (Page -7) Enlarging/reducing the length and width of the image to separate magnification ratios <XY zoom mode> (Page -8) 5% 50% 70% % 00% M M Y % 00% X % Making -sided copies from various types of originals <-sided copy modes> (Page 5-) ing each image of open-faced (books, etc.) or -sided originals onto separate sheets <Page separation/split copy modes> (Page 5-) 6 Creating a margin on the copies <Margin mode> (Page 5-6) 7 Centering the copy image <Centering/Image shift mode> (Page 5-8) 8 Adding a space next to the copy images for making notes <Memo mode> (Page 5-9) 9 Making copies with clean edges <Border erase modes> (Page 5-) 0 Fitting the image of either two or four originals onto a single copy page <Combine/Merge modes> (Page 5-) ing page numbers on the copies < page numbers mode> (Page 5-6) Overlaying one image over another <Form overlay mode> (Page 5-0) A B C D A B C D A B C A B C iv

7 Making booklets from sheet originals <Booklet/Stitching mode> (Page 5-) Making booklets from books <Book to Booklet mode> (Page 5-6) 5 matic sorting of copy sets without the Finisher <Sort/Finished mode> (Page 5-9) a b a b AB AB 6 matic rotation of the copy image < rotation function> (Page 5-0) 7 Adding a front and/or back cover to your copy sets <Cover mode> (Page 5-) 8 Feeding paper as a backing sheet for OHP transparencies <Transparency + backing sheet mode> (Page 5-6) B A 9 Inverting black and white <Invert mode> (Page 5-8) 0 Making mirror image copies <Mirror image mode> (Page 5-9) Making a test copy prior to large volume copying <Proof mode> (Page 5-0) Making more of the same copies after a copy job is finished <Repeat copy mode> (Page 5-) ing a large volume of originals in one operation <Batch scanning mode> (Page 5-7) Saving on toner use <Eco print mode> (Page 5-8) A B C C B A 5 Memorizing frequently used settings <Program function> (Page 5-50) 6 Easily add covers and insert sheets between various sets of originals in one operation <Job build mode> (Page 5-57) 7 ing images to be used for form overlay <Form registration> (Page 6-) v

8 8 Managing shared forms <Shared data box> (Page 6-) 9 ing out different stored originals in one operation <Synergy print boxes> (Page 6-9) 0 Using department ID-codes to manage the number of copies made by each department < management mode> (Page 7-) Changing the language used in the touch panel <Language selection function> (Page 7-0) A full range of optional equipment is available Processor (Page 8-) Paper Feeder (Page 8-5) English Español Paper Feeder (Page 8-5) Finisher (Page 8-5) Finisher (Page 8-9) Finisher (Page 8-9) Built-in Finisher (Page 8-9) Job Separator (Page 8-) Hard Disk (Page 8-) Key (Page 8-) Tray (Page 8-) vi

9 er Kit (Page 8-) er/scanner Kit (Page 8-) Fax Kit (Page 8-) vii

10

11 Please read this Operation Guide before using the copier. Keep it close to the copier for easy reference. The sections of this guide and parts of the copier marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the copier. The symbols and their meanings are indicated below. DANGER: Indicates that serious injury or even death will very possibly result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points. WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points. CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points. Symbols The m symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated inside the symbol.... [General warning]... [Warning of danger of electrical shock]... [Warning of high temperature] The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol.... [Warning of prohibited action]... [Disassembly prohibited] The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol.... [Alert of required action]... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]... [Always connect the copier to an outlet with a ground connection] Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are illegible or if the guide itself is missing. (fee required) ix

12 x

13 Section IMPORTANT! PLEASE READ FIRST. CAUTION LABELS Caution labels have been attached to the copier at the following locations for safety purposes. BE SUFFICIENTLY CAREFUL to avoid fire or electric shock when removing a paper jam or when replacing toner. Label High temperature inside. Do not touch parts in this area, because there is a danger of getting burned. Label High temperature inside. Do not touch parts in this area, because there is a danger of getting burned. Label Do not incinerate toner and toner container. Dangerous sparks may cause burn.... Label Moving parts inside. May cause personal injury. Do not touch moving parts... : DO NOT remove these labels. -

14 INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS Environment CAUTION Avoid placing the copier on or in locations which are unstable or not level. Such locations may cause the copier to fall down or fall over. This type of situation presents a danger of personal injury or damage to the copier.... Avoid locations with humidity or dust and dirt. If dust or dirt become attached to the power plug, clean the plug to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock... Avoid locations near radiators, heaters, or other heat sources, or locations near flammable items, to avoid the danger of fire.... To keep the copier cool and facilitate changing of parts and maintenance, allow access space as shown below. Leave adequate space, especially around the vents, to allow air to be properly ventilated out of the copier.... During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health. If, however, the copier is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated. Power supply/grounding the copier WARNING DO NOT use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections in the same outlet. These types of situations present a danger of fire or electrical shock.... Plug the power cord securely into the outlet. If metallic objects come in contact with the prongs on the plug, it may cause a fire or electric shock. Always connect the copier to an outlet with a ground connection to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock in case of an electric short. If an earth connection is not possible, contact your service representative.... Rear: /6"/0cm = > Other precautions Connect the power plug to the closest outlet possible to the copier. Left: /6"/ 0cm > = Front: 9 /8"/ 00cm > = Right: /6"/0cm = > The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device. Ensure that the socket/outlet is located/installed near the equipment and is easily accessible. Other precautions Adverse environmental conditions may affect the safe operation and performance of the copier. Install in an airconditioned room (recommended room temperature: around 7. F ( C), humidity: around 50%) and avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the copier.. Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.. Avoid locations with vibrations.. Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.. Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.. Avoid poorly ventilated locations. Handling of plastic bags WARNING Keep the plastic bags that are used with the copier away from children. The plastic may cling to their nose and mouth causing suffocation... Delicate floor material may be damaged if this product is moved after installation. -

15 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE Cautions when using the copier WARNING DO NOT place metallic objects or containers with water (flower vases, flower pots, cups, etc.) on or near the copier. This of situation presents a danger of fire or electrical shock should they fall inside.... DO NOT remove any of the covers from the copier as there is a danger of electrical shock from high voltage parts inside the copier.... DO NOT damage, break or attempt to repair the power cord. DO NOT place heavy objects on the cord, pull it, bend it unnecessarily or cause any other type of damage. These types of situations present a danger of fire or electrical shock.... NEVER attempt to repair or disassemble the copier or its parts as there is a danger of fire, electrical shock or damage to the laser. If the laser beam escapes, there is a danger of it causing blindness... If the copier becomes excessively hot, smoke appears from the copier, there is an odd smell, or any other abnormal situation occurs, there is a danger of fire or electrical shock. Turn the main power switch OFF (O) immediately, BE ABSOLUTELY CERTAIN to remove the power plug from the outlet and then contact your service representative.... If anything harmful (paper clips, water, other fluids, etc.) falls into the copier, turn the main power switch OFF (O) immediately. Next, BE ABSOLUTELY CERTAIN to remove the power plug from the outlet to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock. Then contact your service representative.... CAUTION DO NOT pull the power cord when removing it from the outlet. If the power cord is pulled, the wires may become broken and there is a danger of fire or electrical shock. (ALWAYS grasp the power plug when removing the power cord from the outlet.)... ALWAYS remove the power plug from the outlet when moving the copier. If the power cord is damaged, there is a danger of fire or electrical shock.... If the copier will not be used for a short period of time (overnight, etc.), turn the main power switch OFF (O). If it will not be used for an extended period of time (vacations, etc.), remove the power plug from the outlet for safety purposes during the time the copier is not in use.... ALWAYS hold the designated parts only when lifting or moving the copier.... For safety purposes, ALWAYS remove the power plug from the outlet when performing cleaning operations.... If dust accumulates within the copier, there is a danger of fire or other trouble. It is therefore recommended that you consult with your service representative in regard to cleaning of internal parts. This is particularly effective if accomplished prior to seasons of high humidity. Consult with your service representative in regard to the cost of cleaning the internal parts of the copier.... DO NOT remove or connect the power plug with wet hands, as there is a danger of electrical shock.... ALWAYS contact your service representative for maintenance or repair of internal parts.... -

16 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE Other precautions DO NOT place heavy objects on the copier or cause other damage to the copier. DO NOT open the front cover, turn off the main power switch, or pull out the power plug during copying. When lifting or moving the copier, contact your service representative. Do not touch electrical parts, such as connectors or printed circuit boards. They could be damaged by static electricity. DO NOT attempt to perform any operations not explained in this handbook. CAUTION : Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Do not look directly at the light from the scanning lamp as it may cause your eyes to feel tired or painful. Cautions when handling consumables CAUTION DO NOT attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause burns... Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children... If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes and skin..... If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If coughing develops, contact a physician.. If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth out with water and drink or cups of water to dilute the contents of your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.. If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness, contact a physician.. If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water. DO NOT attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box.... Other precautions After use, ALWAYS dispose of the toner container and the waste toner box in accordance with Federal, State and Local rules and regulations. Store all consumables in a cool, dark location. If you will not be using the copier for a prolonged period of time, remove all paper from the drawer(s)[cassette(s)] and the multi-bypass tray and seal in its original packaging. -

17

18 CAUTION! The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source. ATTENTION! Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l appareil hors tension. Les interrupteurs sur l appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement : ils ne mettent pas l appareil hors tension. -6

19 NEW 05/05/505 COPIER LIMITED WARRANTY. Kyocera Mita America, Inc. and Kyocera Mita Canada, Ltd. (both referred to as Kyocera ) warrant the Customer s new copier, and the new accessories installed with the initial installation of the copier, against any defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year, or 00,000 copies/prints from date of installation by an Authorized Kyocera Dealer for the 05, or 500,000 copies/prints from date of installation by an Authorized Kyocera Dealer for the 05 and the 505, whichever first occurs. In the event the copier or an accessory is found to be defective within the warranty period, Kyocera s only obligation and the Customer s exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts. It is understood that Kyocera shall have no obligation to furnish labor.. This warranty is valid only as to the original retail purchaser (referred to as the Customer ) of a new Kyocera copier in the United States of America, or Canada based upon the country of purchase.. In order to obtain performance of this warranty, the Customer must immediately notify the Authorized Kyocera Dealer from whom the product was purchased. If the Kyocera Dealer is not able to provide service, write to Kyocera at the address below for the name and address of the Authorized Kyocera Dealer in your area.. This warranty does not cover copiers or accessories: (a) which have become damaged due to operator negligence, misuse, accidents, improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress, (b) which have used parts or supplies which are not genuine Kyocera brand parts or supplies, (c) which have been serviced by a technician not employed by Kyocera or an Authorized Kyocera Dealer, or (d) which have had the serial number modified, altered, or removed. 5. This warranty does not cover Maintenance Kits or the components of Maintenance Kits, which consist of the drum unit, the fixing unit, and the developing unit. Kyocera shall give the Customer a separate warranty for these items. 6. This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. The Customer may also have other rights, which vary from state to state, or province to province. Neither the seller, nor any other person is authorized to extend the time period, or expand this warranty on behalf of Kyocera. 7. THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND (CONDITIONS), EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY (OR CONDITION) OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO, AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR, ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF THE USE, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE COPIER. -7

20 WARNING This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 5 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/tv technician for help. CAUTION The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment. * The above warning is valid only in the United States of America. MERCURY WARNING THE LAMP(S) INSIDE THIS PRODUCT CONTAIN MERCURY AND MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF ACCORDING TO LOCAL, STATE OR FEDERAL LAWS. -8

21 Section NAMES OF PARTS. Main body Original cover (Option) (Open/close to set the original on the platen.) Operation panel (Contains the keys and indicators for operating the copier.) Left cover handle (Pull up to open the left cover.) Left cover (Open when a paper misfeed occurs.) 5 Platen ( originals here for copying. Place originals face-down with the edges aligned with the size scales on the left and rear sides of the platen.) 6 Original size scales (Be sure to align the original with these when setting the original on the platen.) 7 Drawer[Cassette] (Holds up to 500 sheets of standard paper [standard paper specified by our company].) 8 Drawer[Cassette] (Holds up to 500 sheets of standard paper [standard paper specified by our company].) 9 Left cover (Open when a paper misfeed occurs inside the left cover.) -

22 Section NAMES OF PARTS 7B 8C I 9D 0E A F 0 K J L G H 0 Multi-bypass tray (Load paper here when copying onto small-size or special paper.)! Insert guides (Be sure to set the paper width when loading paper on the multi-bypass Toner container # Toner container release lever (Operate to replace the toner container.) $ Waste toner box % Cleaning shaft (Pull and push back in after toner container replacement or when copy images become soiled with toner.) ^ Front cover (Open to replace the toner container or waste toner box.) & Main power switch (Turn ON ( ) before starting to make copies.) * Main power switch cover (only on metric specification copiers) (Open this cover in order to access the main power switch.) ( store section (Copied paper is stored here.) ) Length adjustment plate (Adjust to the length of the paper to be set in the drawer[cassette].) Width adjustment lever (Hold the lever and adjust the width guide to the width of the paper to be set in the drawer[cassette].) Handles for transport (Become handles when pulled out.) -

23 Section NAMES OF PARTS. Operation 0 ( * & ^ % ) # $ 9 8 [Start] key & indicator lamp (Press this key when the lamp in that key is lit green and you want to start copying.) [Stop/Clear] key (Press this key when you want to stop copying or change the number of copies to be made.) [Reset] key (Press this key to reset all functions to their initial mode settings. See Initial mode on page -.) [Energy Saver] key & indicator lamp (Press this key when you want to turn the energy-saving mode ON. Press the same key again to turn the energy-saving mode OFF. In metric specification copiers, this key corresponds to the Low power mode. See page -.) 5 [Interrupt] key & indicator lamp (Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to perform interrupt copying. See page -9.) 6 [] key (When copy management is turned ON, press this key after copying in order to return to the department ID-code entry display. See page 7-.) 7 [Default ting/] key (Press this key when you want to perform settings as well as those related to copy management, etc.) 8 Keypad (Use these keys when you want to set the number of copies to be made or enter other values.) 9 Touch panel (This panel displays such information as operation procedures, machine status, and the various function keys.) 0 Brightness adjustment control dial (Turn this dial when you want to adjust the brightness of the touch panel.)! [Copier] key, lamp & indicator (Press this key to light the indicator to the right of the key when you want to use the copier functions of this [er] key, lamp & indicator (Press this key when you want to use the optional printer functions of this machine. The indicator to the right of the key will light when the machine is in the printer operation mode. The lamp to the left of the key will either light green or orange, or will flash one of those colors, depending upon the status of the machine. See page 9-.) # [Scanner] key, lamp & indicator (Press this key when you want to use the optional scanner functions of this machine. The indicator to the right of the key will light when the machine is in the scanner operation mode. The lamp to the left of the key will either light green or orange, or will flash one of those colors, depending upon the status of the machine. See page 9-.) $ [Fax] key, lamp & indicator (Press this key when you want to use the optional fax functions of this machine. The indicator to the right of the key will light when the machine is in the fax operation mode. The lamp to the left of the key will either light or flash green, depending upon the status of the machine. ) % [ ion] key & indicator lamp (Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use the auto selection mode. The optional Processor must be installed in your copier in order to use this mode. See page 8-.) ^ [Job Build] key & indicator lamp (Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use the job build mode. See page 5-57.) & [Repeat ] key & indicator lamp (Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use the repeat copy mode. The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to use this mode. See page 5-.) * [Job Queue] key & indicator lamp (Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use the output management functions of the copier. See page 6-0.) ( [ ] key & indicator lamp (Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use the document management functions of the copier. The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to use this function.see page 6-.) -

24 Section NAMES OF PARTS ) [Power] key & indicator lamp (only on metric specification copiers) (Press this key when you want to turn the Sleep mode ON. Press the same key again to turn the Sleep mode OFF. See page -.) Main power indicator lamp (only on metric specification copiers) (This lamp will light when the main power switch is turned ON ( ).) Initial mode (at the end of warm-up or when the [Reset] key is pressed) In the settings prepared at the factory, paper of the same size as the original is selected automatically and the copy magnification ratio is set to 00% [:] (under the auto paper selection mode), the number of copies to be made is set to and the image quality is set to the text+photo mode. S The settings for the initial mode can be changed using the corresponding copy settings procedure. It is possible for you to change the setting for the copy exposure in the initial mode from the manual exposure mode to the auto exposure mode. (See Exposure mode on page 7-6.) clear function ce a designated amount of time has passed after copying stops (between 0 and 70 seconds), the auto clear function will automatically engage and the copier will return to the same settings as those after warm up (initial mode settings). (However, the copy exposure mode and the image quality mode will not change.) Copies can continually be made using the same settings (copy mode, number of copies and exposure mode) if the next batch of copying is started before the auto clear function engages. matic drawer[cassette] switching function If two drawers[cassettes] contain the same size of paper and the paper in one drawer[cassette] runs out during copying, the automatic drawer[cassette] switching function will switch to paper feed from the other drawer[cassette] that still contains paper. S The automatic drawer[cassette] switching function can be turned OFF. (See drawer[cassette] switching ON/OFF on page 7-.) Paper must be loaded in the same orientation in both drawers[cassettes]. ly drawers[cassettes] that are loaded with the same type of paper can be used with the automatic drawer[cassette] switching function. -

25 Section NAMES OF PARTS. Touch panel Paper Size x8 /" x8 /" 8 /x" Color x8 /" x8 /" Recycled APS Exposure Exposure mode AMS Reduce /Enlarge Sort: Sort: Sort/ Finished Combine Orig.image quality Reduce /Enlarge ^ Basic User choice Function Program & * ( 9 7! 0# $ % Paper Size Merge copy Colour APS Exposure AMS Sort: Sort: Image quality Reduce/ Enlarge ^ Recycled Exposure mode Reduce/ Enlarge Sort/ Finished Basic User choice Function Program & * ( 9 7! 0# $ % -5

26 Section NAMES OF PARTS This area displays messages on the machine's status and on operational procedures. This area displays information on the size of paper in the drawer[cassette] and the current copy magnification ratio. This area displays the current number of copies to be made. keys (Remaining paper volume icons) (Touch these keys when you want to change the currently selected drawer[cassette] in order to change the size of paper that will be used. The drawer[cassette] that holds the currently selected paper size and type of paper will be highlighted. Drawer[Cassette] No. and drawer[cassette] No. will be displayed when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier.) 5 APS key (Touch this key until it is highlighted when you want to have the paper size selected automatically. See page -.) 6 key (Touch this key when you want to copy onto paper that is set on the multi-bypass tray. The type of paper registered for use on the multi-bypass tray will be indicated in the key.) 7 exposure adjustment keys / exposure scale (Touch the appropriate key when you want to manually adjust the copy exposure. The copy exposure scale will indicate the currently selected setting. See page -.) 8 Exposure mode key (Touch this key when you want to access the Exposure Mode screen.) 9 Exposure key (Touch this key until it is highlighted when you want to select the auto exposure mode. In the auto exposure mode, the contrast of the original will be detected and the most suitable exposure level selected automatically. See page -.) 0 AMS key (Touch this key until it is highlighted when you want to have the copy magnification ratio selected automatically. See page -5.)! Reduce/Enlarge key (Touch this key when you want to manually change the copy magnification ratio. See page 00% (same size) key (Touch this key when you want to copy the original image at its actual size 00%.) # Sort:OFF key (Touch this key when you want to make copies without sorting them.) $ Sort:ON key (Touch this key when you want to make copies in the sort mode.) % Sort/Finish key (Touch this key when you want to access the Sort/Finish screen. See page 5-9.) ^ Registration keys (Touch the appropriate key when you want to access the corresponding function or mode. Any function or mode in the Function tab can be registered to be displayed as one of the registration key. See page 5-5.) & Basic tab (Touch this tab when you want to return the display to the contents of the Basic tab.) * User choice tab (Touch this tab when you want to display the contents of the User choice tab.) sided/ Separation Combine Basic orig.size -sided/ Split Merge copy Basic Orig.image quality Margin/ Centering User choice Function Program size orig. Image quality Margin/ Imag. shift User choice Function Program Border Erase Erase Mode ( Function tab (Touch this tab when you want to display the contents of the Function tab.) paper Exposure mode Orig.image quality Sort/ Finished sided/ Separation Reduce /Enlarge Margin/ Centering Border Erase ion Page # Cover Mode Combine Batch scanning Forms Overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program Rotation Eco Modify OHP backing Orig. set direction Proof Invert Memo pages Mirror Basic User choice Function Program paper Exposure mode Image quality Sort/ Finished -sided/ Split Reduce/ Enlarge Margin/ Imag. shift Erase Mode Page numbering Merge copy Basic User choice Function Program size orig. selection Cover Mode Large # of originals Form overlay Booklet x8 /" x8 /" Rotation OHP back Test copy Memo pages Eco Orig. set direction Invert Mirror Modify copy Basic User choice Function Program -6

27 Section NAMES OF PARTS ) Program tab (Touch this tab when you want to register the currently selected settings as a program, or to delete a previously registered program. See page 5-50.) You can change or add new keys to those displayed in the Basic and the User choice tabs by following the Customize screen layout (Main functions) procedure on page 7-85 or the Customize screen layout (Add functions) procedure on page 7-86, as appropriate. If you press any key that has an arrow (P) in its bottom right corner, the corresponding setting screen will be displayed. x8 /" paper Exposure mode Orig.image quality Sort/ Finished sided/ Separation Reduce /Enlarge Margin/ Centering Border Erase ion Page # Cover Mode Combine Batch scanning Forms Overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program paper Exposure mode Image quality Sort/ Finished -sided/ Split Reduce/ Enlarge Margin/ Imag. shift Erase Mode size orig. selection Page numbering Cover Mode Merge copy Large # of originals Form overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program key (Touch this key when you want to register the currently selected function or mode under a registration key. See page 5-5.) key (Touch this key when you want to return the settings for the currently selected mode back to their previous values.) key (Touch this key when you want to return to the previous screen.) x8 /" 00% Reduce/Enlarge (5~00) Standard Zoom XY Zoom # keys 00 % AMS 00% 00% 00% 5 /x8 /" x7" 5% 5 /x8 /" 8 /x" 9% 8 /x" x7" % 8 /x" x7" 78% 8 /x" 8 /x" 77% x7" 8 /x" 6% x7" 8 /x" 50% x7" 5 /x8 /" 5% 00% Reduce/Enlarge (5~00) Standard Zoom XY Zoom #-Keys 00 % AMS 00% 00% 00% A 5 A % A A A 5 A 7% Folio A 06% x5" A 90% Folio A 75% x5" A 70% A A A A 5 50% 5% (Asia Pacific) 00% Reduce/Enlarge (5~00) Standard Zoom XY Zoom #-Keys 00 % AMS 00% 00% 00% A 5 A % % 5% 86% A A B 5 B A B A 5 B 5 B A B 5 A A B A B 5 8% 70% 50% 5% B A B 5 A 5 A A B B 5-7

28 Section NAMES OF PARTS -8

29 Section PREPARATIONS. Loading paper Paper can be loaded into the two drawers[cassettes] and the multibypass tray. () Note when adding paper After taking new paper out of its packaging, be sure to fan through them a few times to separate the sheets and use a flat surface to align the leading edges of the paper before loading that paper into a drawer[cassette] or setting it on the multi-bypass tray. IMPORTANT! Using special paper In this copier, the type of paper loaded in each drawer[cassette] and on the multi-bypass tray can be specified under Paper type (drawer[cassette] No. - No.) on page 7- and () and type on page 7-87, respectively. Among the special paper that can be use with this copier, there is a wide range in paper quality and construction, especially in those types of paper noted below. For that reason, there is a greater possibility of problems occurring during copying with these type of paper. Whenever you do use such special paper as noted here, it is recommended that you first make a test copy and verify the results. <Special paper for which extra caution is recommended> Preprinted Labels * Prepunched Envelopes * the paper in the drawer[cassette] with the side that was facing upward when you opened the package facing upward. * When using label sheets, be absolutely certain that there is no possibility that the backing glue will come into contact with any part of the copier, and that none of the labels will come off the sheet during copying. If glue does happen to come into contact with the drum or rollers, or one of the labels comes off inside the copier, it can be the cause of major damage. * The following types of envelopes should never be used: Those on which the glue is exposed. Those whereby glue will be exposed if the protective paper is removed. (If the paper protecting the glue comes off inside the copier it can be the cause of major damage.) Those of special construction. Those which have a round tab on the back and are closed with string. Those which have an open window. Those which have a transparent film window. IMPORTANT! When copying onto used paper (paper which has already been copied onto at least one side), DO NOT use paper that is stapled or clipped together as this can be the cause of damage to the copier and/or create problems in the copy image. If you use paper that is curled at all, straighten the paper out before loading it into a drawer[cassette] or setting it on the multi-bypass tray, or it can cause a paper jam. When using prepunched, preprinted or letterhead paper, refer to Special paper action setting on page

30 Section PREPARATIONS () Loading paper into the drawer[cassette] to 500 sheets of standard paper (75 or 80 g/m /standard paper as specified by our company) or colored paper can be loaded into the each drawer[cassette]. the paper flush against the left-hand wall of the drawer[cassette]. The each drawer[cassette] can be set to hold paper of any desired size from 5 /" x 8 /", 8 /" x ", " x 8 /", 8 /" x ", 8 /" x ", " x 7", A5R, B5R, B5, AR, A, B, A, Folio, 8K and 6K. IMPORTANT! the type of paper (standard paper, recycled paper, etc.) to be loaded in the drawer[cassette] in Paper type (drawer[cassette] No. - No. ) on page 7-. Pull the drawer[cassette] out toward you as far as it will go. * Do not pull more than one drawer[cassette] out at a time. Hold the width adjustment lever and move it to align the width guide with the required paper width. s are marked inside the drawer[cassette]. IMPORTANT! Make sure that there are no folds, etc., in the paper when it is set in a drawer[cassette]. Such paper may be the cause of paper jams. There is a sticker ( in the illustration) indicating paper capacity attached to the inside of the drawer[cassette]. Do not load paper above this limit. When you are loading paper into a drawer[cassette], make sure that the side facing upward when the package is opened is the side that is facing upward in the drawer[cassette]. Adjust the length adjustment plate and the width guide BEFORE loading paper into a drawer[cassette]. Failure to do so may result in skewed paper feed or a paper jam. Make sure that the paper is set securely against the length adjustment plate and the width guide. If there is a gap between the paper and the adjustment plate or the width guide, readjust the plate and the guide to fit the paper snugly. Hold the length adjustment plate and move it to align with the required paper length. -

31 Section PREPARATIONS 5 the supplied paper size sheet so that the size of the paper loaded can be checked by looking at the front of the drawer[cassette]. Open the multi-bypass tray. 6 Gently push the drawer[cassette] back in. Adjust the insert guides to the size of the paper to be loaded. Before leaving the copier in disuse for a prolonged period of time, remove the paper from the drawer(s)[cassette(s)] and seal it in its original packaging to protect from moisture. Also, when storing paper in a high temperature and high humidity environment, seal it in a moisture-proof bag. () Loading paper into the multi-bypass tray to 00 sheets of standard copy paper (75 g/m 80 g/m ), of a size between " x 7" [A] and 5 /" x 8 /" [A6R] can be set on the multi-bypass tray at one time. When copying onto special paper, be sure to use the multi-bypass tray. Insert the paper along the guides as far as it will go. The types of special paper and the number of sheets that can be loaded in the multi-bypass tray are: Transparencies: 5 sheets Standard paper (0 g/m ): 0 sheets Standard paper (60 g/m ): 00 sheets IMPORTANT! When copying onto OHP transparencies, be sure to fan through them a few times to separate the sheets before setting them on the multi-bypass tray. When copying onto non-standard size paper, perform the procedure in () and type on page 7-87 and select the paper size. When setting special paper such as OHP transparencies and thick paper on the multi-bypass tray, the type of paper must be specified under () and type on page You can select to have the setting screen (see page 7-86) displayed whenever the key is touched. (See Multi-bypass tray setting display ON/OFF on page 7-5.) IMPORTANT! When you are setting paper onto the multi-bypass tray, make sure that the side facing upward when the package is opened is the side that is facing upward on the multi-bypass tray as well. In addition, if the leading edge of the paper is curled at all, straighten it out before setting it on the multi-bypass tray. ALWAYS straighten out curled paper before setting it on the multibypass tray. -

32 Section PREPARATIONS ting envelopes to 0 envelopes can be set on the multi-bypass tray at a time. Refer to the following table for the types and sizes of envelopes that can be used in this machine. Acceptable envelope types Monarch Comm. #0 /8" x 7 /" /8" x 9 /" Size When using envelopes that are wider than they are tall, leave the flap closed and set the envelopes with the copy side facing upward and the flap facing towards the rear of the copier. Then slide the envelopes into the slot along the insert guides as far as they will go. When using envelopes that are taller than they are wide, open the flap and set the envelopes with the copy side facing upward and the flap facing away from the direction of insertion. Then slide the envelopes into the slot along the insert guides as far as they will go. Envelope DL Envelope C5 Executive Comm. #9 Comm. #6-/ ISO B5 Envelope C Oufuku Hagaki YOUKEI YOUKEI Open the multi-bypass tray. 0 x 0 (mm) 6 x 9 (mm) 7 /" x 0 /" 7/8" x 8 7/8" 5/8" x 6 /" 76 x 50 (mm) 9 x (mm) 00 x 8 (mm) 6 x (mm) x 05 (mm) S Copier Copier If the optional er Kit or er/scanner Kit is installed on your copier and you attempt to print from a computer onto envelopes that are wider than they are tall, be sure to leave the flap closed and set the envelopes with the side to be printed onto facing upward. Orient the edge with the flap towards the front of the copier and then slide the envelopes into the slot along the insert guides as far as they will go. Copier Align the insert guides with the envelope size. The proper orientation will actually depend upon the type of envelope being used. Incorrectly loading envelopes can result in printing in the wrong orientation or on the wrong side. When setting envelopes on the multi-bypass tray, BE SURE to specify the type of envelopes that will be used under. Multibypass tray paper settings on page

33 Section BASIC OPERATION. Basic copying procedure x8 /" 8 /x" Color APS x8 /" x8 /" Recycled Exposure Exposure mode AMS Reduce /Enlarge Paper Size x8 /" Sort: Sort: Sort/ Finished Com Ori qua Re /En Basic User choice Function Program. Warm-up Turn the main power switch ON ( ). At the end of warm-up, Ready to copy. will be displayed. S With metric specification copiers you will first need to open the main power switch cover. If you set the originals that you want to copy and press the [Start] key while the copier is still warming up, copying will begin as soon as warm-up is finished. Colour Recycled APS Exposure Exposure mode. ing the desired functions from among the copier s various modes and functions. AMS Reduce/ Enlarge Basic User choice Function Program Sort: Sort: Sort/ Finished Paper Size Mer Ima qua Re En. ting the originals Open the original cover and set the original that you want to copy face-down on the platen. Be sure to align originals with the upper left corner of the platen (towards the left-rear portion of the copier). See How to set originals in the Processor on page 8- for instructions on how to set originals in your Processor (option). Enlarging/reducing the copy image (Page -5.) Interrupt copying (Page -9.) Making -sided copies from various types of originals (Page 5-.) ing each image of open-faced (books, magazines, etc.) or -sided originals onto separate sheets (Page 5-.) Creating a margin on the copies (Page 5-6.) Centering the copy image (Page 5-8.) Adding a space next to the copy images for making notes (Page 5-9.) Making copies with clean edges (Page 5-.) Fitting the image of either two or four originals onto a single copy page (Page 5-.) ing page numbers on the copies (Page 5-6.) Overlaying one image over another (Page 5-0.) Making booklets from sheet originals (Page 5-.) Making booklets from book originals (Page 5-6.) matic sorting of copy sets without the Finisher (Page 5-9.) matic rotation of the copy image (Page 5-0.) Adding a front and/or back cover to your copy sets (Page 5-.) Feeding paper as a backing sheet for OHP transparencies (Page 5-6.) Inverting black and white (Page 5-8.) Making mirror image copies (Page 5-9.) Making a test copy prior to large volume copying (Page 5-0.) Making more of the same copies after a copy job is finished (Page 5-.) ing a large volume of originals in one operation (Page 5-7.) Easily add covers and insert sheets between various sets of originals in one operation (Page 5-57.) -

34 Section BASIC OPERATION x8 /" 8 /x" Color x8 /" x8 /" Recycled APS Exposure Exposure mode AMS Reduce /Enlarge Basic User choice Function Program Paper Size x8 /" Sort: Sort: Sort/ Finished Com Ori qua Re /En 5 x8 /" 8 /x" Color x8 /" x8 /" Recycled APS Exposure Exposure mode AMS Reduce /Enlarge Paper Size Me 5 Colour Recycled APS Exposure Exposure mode AMS Reduce/ Enlarge Basic User choice Function Program Sort: Sort: Sort/ Finished Ima qua Re En Colour Recycled APS Exposure Exposure mode AMS Reduce/ Enlarge. ing the paper size When the APS key is highlighted on the touch panel, copy paper of the same size as the original will be automatically selected. In order to copy the original onto a different size of paper without changing the size of the image, touch the paper size key that corresponds to the paper size that you want to use. S You can stop the copier from automatically selecting the paper size. (See Paper selection on page 7-68.) It is also possible for you to specify one drawer[cassette] that will be selected automatically regardless of the size of paper loaded in that drawer[cassette]. (See Default drawer[cassette] on page 7-70.) 5. Adjusting the copy exposure Adjustment of the copy exposure is generally accomplished manually. If you want to make the exposure darker, touch the right exposure adjustment key to move the arrow under the exposure scale to the right; If you want to make the exposure lighter, touch the left exposure adjustment key to move the arrow under the exposure scale to the left. If you want the copy exposure to be adjusted automatically, touch the Exposure key until it is highlighted. The contrast of the original will be detected and the most suitable exposure level selected automatically. * It is also possible for you to adjust the copy exposure by touching the Exposure Mode key to access the Exposure Mode screen. exposure adjustment can then be performed in this screen using the same methods as above. Paper Size x8 /" Exposure Mode Manual Lighter Darker Exposure mode Manual Lighter Darker S It is possible for you to make adjustments to the auto exposure mode if the overall copies come out too dark or too light. (See exposure adjustment on page 7-7.) It is also possible for you to change the setting for the copy exposure to the auto exposure mode. (See Exposure mode on page 7-6.) -

35 Section BASIC OPERATION 6 paper sided/ Separation Combine x8 /" S 7 Paper Size x8 /" Exposure mode Reduce /Enlarge ion Batch scanning Combine Orig.image quality Sort/ Finished Margin/ Centering Border Erase Page # Cover Mode Forms Overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program uto AMS Sort: S t O Orig.image quality Reduce /Enlarge 6 paper -sided/ Split size orig. Merge copy S 7 Paper Size Exposure mode Reduce/ Enlarge selection Large # of originals Merge copy Image quality Sort/ Finished Margin/ Imag. shift Erase Mode Page numbering Cover Mode Form overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program AMS Sort: S t O Image quality Reduce/ Enlarge 6. ing the image quality The image quality is selected according to the type of original. Touch the Function tab and then the resulting Orig. image quality [ Image quality ] key that is displayed within that tab in order to access the Orig.image quality [ Image quality orig. ] screen. 7. ting the number of copies to be made Use the keypad to change the number of copies to be made that is displayed on the touch panel to the actual number that you want to make. to 999 copies can be made at one time. Orig.image quality Paper Size x8 /" It is possible for you to limit the number of copies (or copy sets) that can be made at a time. (See limit on page 7-8.) Text Photo Photo Text Text Photo: this mode to copy orig. with mixed text and photo Photo:Add a dimensional effect of photo Text : a pencil or fine line. 8 Image quality orig. Text+Photo Photo Text Text+Photo: this mode to copy original mixed (text & photo). Photo:Add a dimensional effect of photo. Text : pencil & fine line clearly. Text+photo mode: Touch the Text+Photo key until it is highlighted. this mode when the original contains a mixture of both text and photographs. Photo mode: Touch the Photo key until it is highlighted. this mode to bring out the depth in photographs. Text mode: Touch the Text key until it is highlighted. this mode especially to reproduce originals written in pencil of which contain thin lines. 8. Start copying Press the [Start] key. ce the lamp in the [Start] key is lit green and is displayed, copying is possible. Now copying. Orig. page x8 /" sided APS Rear Count/ x8 /" sided Sort Output Inner tray Pause S Job It is possible for you to change the image quality mode that will be the setting in the initial mode. (See Original quality onpage 7-65.) It is also possible for you to adjust the copy exposure in each of the image quality modes. (See Manual exposure adjustment (text+photo mode) on page 7-75, Manual exposure adjustment (text mode) on page 7-76 and Manual exposure adjustment (photo mode) on page 7-77.) Now copying. Original -sided APS R top / rear Count/set -sided Sort Output Inner tray Stop / Change Job -

36 Section BASIC OPERATION 9 Metric specification copiers have a main power switch cover. 9. At the end of copying Finished copies will be ejected onto the copy store section. IMPORTANT! to 50 copies can be stored on the copy store section. If The output tray exceeds capacity. Remove the paper. [ Too much paper in output tray. Remove paper. ] is displayed, there are too many copies on the top tray. Remove the copies from the copy store section and then press the [Start] key to resume copying. If ejected copies come out curled, or are otherwise not stored cleanly, remove the paper from the drawer[cassette] or the multibypass tray (whichever is currently being used), turn the paper over, set it again in that location and try to copy again. CAUTION If the copier will not be used for a short period of time (overnight, etc.), turn the main power switch OFF (O). If it will not be used for an extended period of time (vacations, etc.), remove the power plug from the outlet for safety purposes during the time the copier is not in use. IMPORTANT! (For metric specification copiers) If you turn the main power switch OFF (O) or remove the power plug from its outlet when the optional er Kit, er/scanner Kit or Fax Kit is installed on your copier, the corresponding print out and fax communication operations will not be possible. To keep those functions enabled, press the [Power] key to put the copier into the Sleep mode rather than turning the main power switch OFF. -

37 . Enlarging/reducing the copy image () magnification selection mode With this mode, the original image is enlarged/reduced automatically according to the selected paper size. Section BASIC OPERATION the size of paper that you want to copy onto by touching the appropriate paper size key. Touch the AMS key. The corresponding magnification ratio will be displayed. Paper Size x8 /" x8 /" 8 /x" Color x8 /" x8 /" Recycled APS Exposure Exposure mode AMS Reduce /Enlarge Sort: Sort: Sort/ Finished Combine Orig.image quality Reduce /Enlarge Basic User choice Function Program Paper Size Merge copy IMPORTANT! If you use this mode most often, select AMS under Default magnification ratio on page 7-7. Colour Recycled APS Exposure Exposure mode AMS Reduce/ Enlarge Sort: Sort: Sort/ Finished Image quality Reduce/ Enlarge Basic User choice Function Program the original to be copied. The copier will automatically detect the size of the originals and select copy paper of that same size. Press the [Start] key to begin the copying procedure. Paper Size x8 /" x8 /" 8 /x" Color x8 /" x8 /" Recycled APS Exposure Exposure mode AMS Reduce /Enlarge Sort: Sort: Sort/ Finished Combine Orig.image quality Reduce /Enlarge Basic User choice Function Program Paper Size Merge copy Colour APS Exposure AMS Sort: Sort: Image quality Reduce/ Enlarge Recycled Exposure mode Reduce/ Enlarge Sort/ Finished Basic User choice Function Program -5

38 Section BASIC OPERATION () Zoom mode With this mode, the magnification ratio can be set to any % increment between 5% and 00%. Touch the + key or the - key to change the displayed magnification ratio to the desired setting. * The desired magnification ratio can also be entered directly by touching the # keys [ #-Keys ] key and then using the keypad. 5% x8 /" 00% Reduce/Enlarge (5~00) 00% Standard Zoom XY Zoom # keys 00 % AMS 00% 00% 00% 5 /x8 /" x7" 5% 5 /x8 /" 8 /x" 9% 8 /x" x7" % 8 /x" x7" 78% 8 /x" 8 /x" 77% x7" 8 /x" 6% x7" 8 /x" 50% x7" 5 /x8 /" 5% the original to be copied. Reduce/Enlarge (5~00) 00% Touch the Reduce/Enlarge key. The Reduce/Enlarge screen will be displayed. Standard Zoom XY Zoom #-Keys 00 % AMS 00% 00% 00% A 5 A % A A A 5 A 7% Folio A 06% x5" A 90% Folio A 75% x5" A 70% A A A A 5 50% 5% Paper Size x8 /" (Asia Pacific) x8 /" 8 /x" Color x8 /" x8 /" Recycled APS Exposure Exposure mode AMS Reduce /Enlarge Basic User choice Function Program Sort: Sort: Sort/ Finished Combine Orig.image quality Reduce /Enlarge Reduce/Enlarge Standard Zoom XY Zoom (5~00) 00 % #-Keys AMS 00% 00% 00% % % 5% 86% A 5 A 00% A A B 5 B A B A 5 B 5 B A B 5 A A B A B 5 8% 70% 50% 5% B A B 5 A 5 A A B B 5 Colour APS Exposure AMS Sort: Sort: Paper Size Merge copy Image quality Reduce/ Enlarge Press the [Start] key to begin the copying procedure. Recycled Exposure mode Reduce/ Enlarge Sort/ Finished Basic User choice Function Program -6

39 () Preset zoom mode With this mode, the magnification ratio can be set to one of the preset ratios: [Available magnification ratios] Inch specification Reduction 5% 50% (" x 7" R 5 /" x 8 /") 6% (" x 7" R 8 /" x ") 77% (" x 7" R 8 /" x ") 78% (8 /" x " R 8 /" x ") Enlargement % (8 /" x " R " x 7") 9% (8 /" x " R " x 7") 5% (5 /" x 8 /" R 8 /" x ") 00% (5 /" x 8 /" R " x 7") 00% Metric specification Reduction 5% 50% 70% (A R A, A R A5) 75% (" x 5" R A) 90% (Folio R A) Enlargement 06% (" x 5" R A) 7% (Folio R A) % (A R A, A5 R A) 00% (A5 R A) 00% Metric specification (Asia Pacific) Reduction 5% 50% 70% (A R A, B R B5) 8% (B R A, B5 R A5) 86% (A R B, A R B5) Enlargement 5% (B R A, B5 R A) % (A R B, A5 R B5) % (A R A, B5 R B) 00% (A5 R A) 00% the original to be copied. Touch the Reduce/Enlarge key. The Reduce/Enlarge screen will be displayed. Section BASIC OPERATION Touch the preset zoom key that corresponds to the magnification ratio that you want to use. Reduce/Enlarge Standard Zoom XY Zoom (5~00) 00 % # keys Reduce/Enlarge Standard Zoom XY Zoom (5~00) 00 % #-Keys x8 /" 00% AMS 5% 77% 5 /x8 /" 8 /x" x7" 8 /x" 00% 9% 6% 8 /x" x7" x7" 8 /x" 00% % 50% 8 /x" x7" x7" 5 /x8 /" 00% 78% 5% 5 /x8 /" x7" 8 /x" 8 /x" AMS 00% 00% 00% (Asia Pacific) Reduce/Enlarge Standard Zoom XY Zoom (5~00) 00 % #-Keys AMS 00% 00% 00% 00% % A A 75% A 5 A x5" A 7% 70% A A Folio A A A 5 06% 50% x5" A 90% 5% A 5 A Folio A % % 5% 86% A 5 A 00% A A B 5 B A B A 5 B 5 B A B 5 A A B A B 5 8% 70% 50% 5% You can also change the magnification ratio in % increments by touching the + key or the - key, as appropriate. Press the [Start] key to begin the copying procedure. B A B 5 A 5 A A B B 5 Paper Size x8 /" x8 /" 8 /x" Color x8 /" x8 /" Recycled APS Exposure Exposure mode AMS Reduce /Enlarge Sort: Sort: Sort/ Finished Combine Orig.image quality Reduce /Enlarge Basic User choice Function Program Paper Size Merge copy Colour APS Exposure AMS Sort: Sort: Image quality Reduce/ Enlarge Recycled Exposure mode Reduce/ Enlarge Sort/ Finished Basic User choice Function Program -7

40 Section BASIC OPERATION () XY zoom mode With this mode, it is possible for you to select the length and width of the copy image separately. The magnification ratio can be set to any % increment between 5% and 00%. Touch the XY Zoom key. The screen to select the magnification ratio will be displayed. x8 /" 00% Reduce/Enlarge (5~00) M M Y X % % Standard Zoom XY Zoom # keys Reduce/Enlarge 00 % AMS 5% 77% 5 /x8 /" 8 /x" x7" 8 /x" 00% 9% 6% 8 /x" x7" x7" 8 /x" 00% % 50% 8 /x" x7" x7" 5 /x8 /" 00% 78% 5% 5 /x8 /" x7" 8 /x" 8 /x" 00% (5~00) the originals to be copied. Standard Zoom XY Zoom #-Keys 00 % AMS 00% 00% 00% A 5 A % A A A 5 A 7% Folio A 06% x5" A 90% Folio A 75% x5" A 70% A A A A 5 50% 5% Touch the Reduce/Enlarge key. The Reduce/Enlarge screen will be displayed. (Asia Pacific) 00% x8 /" 8 /x" Color x8 /" x8 /" Recycled APS Exposure Exposure mode AMS Reduce /Enlarge Paper Size x8 /" Sort: Sort: Sort/ Finished Combine Orig.image quality Reduce /Enlarge Reduce/Enlarge Standard Zoom XY Zoom (5~00) 00 % #-Keys AMS 00% 00% 00% % % 5% 86% A 5 A A A B 5 B A B A 5 B 5 B A B 5 A A B A B 5 8% 70% 50% 5% B A B 5 A 5 A A B B 5 Basic User choice Function Program Paper Size Merge copy Touch the + key or the - key, as appropriate, specify the desired magnification ratio for the width and then the length of the image. It is also possible for you to enter the desired ratio directly by touching the corresponding # keys [ #-Keys ] key and then using the keypad. Colour Recycled APS Exposure Exposure mode AMS Reduce/ Enlarge Basic User choice Function Program Sort: Sort: Sort/ Finished Image quality Reduce/ Enlarge Reduce/Enlarge Y X Paper Size x8 /" Y X Check direction Check direction of original top side. Standard Zoom + + XY Zoom # keys # keys Rear Left top corner Y: X: Reduce/Enlarge Y X Check direction Check direction of original. Standard Zoom XY Zoom #-Keys #-Keys Edge Left top corner 5 6 Touch the appropriate key on the right side of the touch panel to specify the direction in which the original was set. Press the [Start] key to begin the copying procedure. -8

41 . Interrupt copying Interrupt copying is useful if, during one copy job, you want to copy other originals at different settings. ce the rush job is completed, the interrupted copy job can be resumed at the same settings as before. Section BASIC OPERATION When copying is completed, press the [Interrupt] key once again. The lamp in the [Interrupt] key will go out. Replace the newly copied originals with the ones removed before. Then, press the [Start] key. The interrupted copy job will be resumed. A A Press the [Interrupt] key to light the lamp in the [Interrupt] key. Interrupt mode OK will be displayed. Remove the originals that were currently being copied and put them aside. the new originals and perform the desired copy procedure. -9

42 Section BASIC OPERATION. Job reservation jobs can be scheduled even while another copy job is in progress any time the Reserve next copy key is displayed. Now copying. Orig. page Count/ x8 /" 00% x8 /" sided APS sided Rear Sort /999 Output Inner tray Memory usage 0% Reserve next copy Pause Touch the Reserve next copy key. The (Job reservation) screen will be displayed. Now copying. Orig. page Count/ x8 /" 00% x8 /" sided APS sided Rear Sort /999 Output Inner tray Memory usage 0% Reserve next copy Pause Now copying. Original 00% -sided APS R top / rear -sided Sort Count/set /999 Output Inner tray Reserve next copy Stop /Change Now copying. Original 00% -sided APS R top / rear -sided Sort Count/set /999 Output Inner tray Reserve next copy Stop /Change You can enter the corresponding copy settings and scan in the originals in preparation for your copy job even before the other job is completed. ce that job is finished and print out is possible, the operation for the reserved job will begin automatically. Job reservation is not available if the Reserve next copy key isn t displayed. S The optional Hard Disk must be installed on your copier in order to use this function. If the optional Fax Kit, er Kit or er/scanner Kit are installed in your copier, job reservation will be possible during print out of both received fax jobs and print jobs. the originals to be copied. the settings and functions that you want to use for that copy job. (Job reservation) Paper Size x8 /" x8 /" 8 /x" Color x8 /" x8 /" Recycled APS Exposure Exposure mode AMS Reduce /Enlarge Basic User choice Function Program Sort: Sort: Sort/ Finished Combine Orig.image quality Reduce /Enlarge Finish Job res. (Jobreservation) Paper Size Color Recycled APS Exposure Exposure mode AMS Reduce/ Enlarge Basic User choice Function Program Sort: Sort: Sort/ Finished Merge copy Image quality Reduce/ Enlarge Job resrv. finished Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start. ce all of the originals have been completely scanned, the touch panel will return to the screen in step. -0

43 Section BASIC OPERATION 5. Energy-saving modes Inch specification If you press the [Energy Saver] key, even while the main power switch is still turned ON, the copier will enter one of the following two energysaving modes (a state of rest). Low power mode The lamp in the [Energy Saver] key will be the only lit indication on the operation panel. To resume copying, press the [Energy Saver] key once again. It will take the copier less than seconds to return to a copy-ready state. Sleep mode Just like with the Low power mode, the lamp in the [Energy Saver] key will be the only lit indication on the operation panel, but even less power will be consumed in this mode. To resume copying, press the [Energy Saver] key once again. It will take the copier less than 5 seconds to return to a copy-ready state. The following two functions will also automatically cause the copier to enter the corresponding energy-saving mode if no operation is performed for a designated period of time. low power function If no operation is performed on the copier for a designated period of time (adjustable between and 0 minutes), the auto low power function will engage and cause the copier to automatically enter the Low power mode. The factory setting is for 5 minutes. sleep function If no operation is performed on the copier for a designated period of time (adjustable between and 0 minutes), the auto sleep function will engage and automatically turn the main power switch OFF (O). When you want to make copies again, simply turn the main power switch back ON ( ). The factory setting is for 60 minutes. Energy Saver Interrupt Default ting / Reset Energy Saver Stop/ Clear * 0 # Start S If the optional er Kit or er/scanner Kit is installed in your copier, you can switch between the energy-saving modes (Low power mode and Sleep mode) that will be entered into when the [Energy Saver] key is pressed. To change the energy-saving mode, see Changing the energy-saving mode on page If you are using a standard copier, or if the optional Fax Kit is installed in your copier, you can press the [Energy Saver] key to engage the Low power mode. If the optional Fax Kit, er Kit or er/scanner Kit are installed in your copier and a received fax job or a print job is detected while the copier is in one of the energy-saving modes, it will automatically return to a copy-ready state and print out the corresponding job. Copiers are generally in a standby mode more than they are in actual operation, so power consumption in the standby mode occupies a large part of overall consumption. Having the copier enter a rest state after a certain amount of time, or turning the power completely OFF (O), reduces unnecessary power consumption in the standby mode and as a result can save on electricity bills. S The auto low power function will not engage when the copier is in the sleep mode. In order to change the amount of time that will elapse before the auto low power function engages, see low power time on page 7-8. In order to change the amount of time that will elapse before the auto sleep function engages, see sleep time on page 7-7. In order to disable the auto sleep function, see sleep ON/OFF on page If the optional er Kit or er/scanner Kit is installed in your copier, the copier will enter the Sleep mode whenever the auto sleep function engages. In this state, when the copier detects data for a print job, it will automatically recover to a print-ready state and print out of the corresponding information will begin. If the optional Fax Kit is installed in your copier, the copier will be automatically turned OFF (O) whenever the auto sleep function engages. In this state, when the copier receives an incoming fax, it will automatically recover to a print-ready state and print out of the corresponding information will begin. -

44 Section BASIC OPERATION Metric specification It is possible to put the copier into either one of two energy saving modes (a state of sleep) even when the main power switch is turned ON ( ). Low power mode Press the [Energy Saver] key in order to put the copier into the Low power mode. ly the [Energy Saver], [Power], and main power indicator lamps will light on the operation panel and the rest of the indications will go out. To resume copying, press the [Energy Saver] key once again. It will take the copier less than seconds to return to a copy-ready state. Interrupt Default ting / Reset Energy Saver 9 * 0 # Stop/ Clear Power Start Energy Saver The following two functions will also automatically cause the copier to enter the corresponding energy-saving mode if no operation is performed for a designated period of time. low power function If no operation is performed on the copier for a designated period of time (adjustable between and 0 minutes), the auto low power function will engage and cause the copier to automatically enter the Low power mode. The factory setting is for 5 minutes. sleep function If no operation is performed on the copier for a designated period of time (adjustable between and 0 minutes), the auto sleep function will engage and cause the copier to automatically enter the Sleep mode. The factory setting is for 60 minutes. Copiers are generally in a standby mode more than they are in actual operation, so power consumption in the standby mode occupies a large part of overall consumption. Having the copier enter a rest state after a certain amount of time, reduces unnecessary power consumption in the standby mode and as a result can save on electricity bills. Sleep mode Press the [Power] key in order to put the copier into the Sleep mode. ly the main power indicator lamp will light on the operation panel and the rest of the indications will go out. In the Sleep mode, power consumption is reduced even further than it is in the Low power mode. To resume copying, press the [Power] key once again. It will take the copier less than 5 seconds to return to a copy-ready state. S The auto low power function will not engage when the copier is in the sleep mode. In order to change the amount of time that will elapse before the auto low power function engages, see low power time on page 7-8. In order to change the amount of time that will elapse before the auto sleep function engages, see sleep time on page 7-7. In order to disable the auto sleep function, see sleep ON/OFF on page Interrupt Default ting / Energy Saver Reset Power Stop/ Clear * 0 # Start S If the optional er Kit or er/scanner Kit is installed in your copier, you can switch between the energy-saving modes (Low power mode and Sleep mode) that will be entered into when the [Energy Saver] key is pressed. To change the energy-saving mode, see Changing the energy-saving mode on page If you are using a standard copier, or if the optional Fax Kit is installed in your copier, you can press the [Energy Saver] key to engage the Low power mode. If the optional Fax Kit, er Kit or er/scanner Kit are installed in your copier and a received fax job or a print job is detected while the copier is in one of the energy-saving modes, it will automatically return to a copy-ready state and print out the corresponding job. -

45 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS. Making -sided copies from various types of originals [-sided copy modes] With these modes, -sided copies can be made from a variety of originals including open-faced (books, etc.) or -sided originals. () Making -sided copies from a -sided original With this mode, a -sided original is copied and the front and back sides of the copy paper are used so that the copy looks just like the original. () Making -sided copies from an open-faced (books, etc.) original With this mode, the two facing pages of a book or magazine are copied separately onto the front and back sides of the copy paper by simply pressing the [Start] key. <Original> Left/Right <Finished copy> Left/Right <Original> Left <Finished copy> Book / Duplex Left/Right Top Left Book / Book 0 Top Left/Right Top Top Right Book / Duplex Right Book / Book 0 S ly paper sizes between 5 /" x 8 /", 8 /" x ", " x 8 /", 8 /" x ", 8 /" x ", " x 7", A5R, B5R, B5, AR, A, B, A and Folio can be used in this mode. The Processor (option) must be installed on your copier in order to use this mode. ly 8 /" x ", " x 7", A5R, B5R, AR, B and A size originals can be used in this mode. 5-

46 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS () Making -sided copies from one-sided originals With this mode, multiple one-sided originals are copied onto the front and back sides of the copy paper. If you are copying an odd number of originals, the back side of the last copy page will be blank. the originals to be copied. Touch the Function tab. The content of the Function tab will be displayed. Touch the sided/separation [ -sided/split ] key. The sided/separation [ -sided/split ] screen will be displayed. 5 5 paper sided/ Separation Combine x8 /" Exposure mode Reduce /Enlarge ion Batch scanning Orig.image quality Margin/ Centering Page # Forms Overlay Sort/ Finished Border Erase Cover Mode Booklet Basic User choice Function Program The image that is copied onto the back side of the copies can also be rotated 80 degrees. If you chose the Left/Right [ Left/Right binding ] setting for finished copies: The back side of the copies will be created with the same orientation as the originals. If you chose the Top [ Top binding ] setting for finished copies: The image that is copied onto the back side of the copies will be rotated 80 degrees. If you then bind the copy set at the top, the images will be oriented in the same direction when flipped up like a calendar, etc. ghi def abc ghi abc def ghi abc paper Exposure mode Image quality Sort/ Finished -sided/ Split Reduce/ Enlarge Margin/ Imag. shift Erase Mode size orig. selection Page numbering Cover Mode Merge copy Large # of originals Form overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program If you are copying from -sided originals, touch the sided / sided [ -sided / -sided ] key. If you are copying from open-faced originals, touch the Book / sided [ Book / -sided ] key. If you are copying from - sided originals, touch the sided / sided [ -sided / - sided ] key. If you selected sided / sided [ -sided / -sided ] or Book / sided [ Book / -sided ], go to the next step. If you selected sided / sided [ -sided / -sided ], go directly to step 5. sided/separation x8 /" def sided sided sided sided Book sided sided sided sided sided Book sided Able to copy sided (separate) or sided copy using sided original, Book original or sided original. -sided / Split -sided R-sided -sided R-sided Book R-sided -sided R-sided -sided R-sided Book R-sided Able to copy -sided (separate) or -sided copy using -sided original, book original or -sided original. 5-

47 Specify the binding direction of the originals. Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 6 Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel and verify the direction in which the originals were set. <for -sided originals> to copy. ion sided sided sided sided Book sided Original Open from left/right Open from top Finished Open from left/right Open from top <for open-faced originals> to copy. ion sided sided sided sided Book sided Original Open from left Open from right Finished Book Duplex Book Book IMPORTANT! If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly. <for -sided or -sided originals> x8 /" <for open-faced originals> <for -sided originals> to copy. <for open-faced originals> to copy. Finished Open from left/right Open from top Check direction Check direction of original top side. Rear Left top corner Finished BookR Duplex BookR Book Check direction book original top side direction to back. Original Finished Original Finished -sided R-sided -sided R-sided Book R-sided Left/Right binding Top binding Left/Right binding Top binding -sided R-sided -sided R-sided Book R-sided Left binding Right binding BookR Duplex BookR Book <for -sided or -sided originals> <for open-faced originals> 5 the binding direction you want for the finished copies. <for -sided or -sided originals> <for open-faced originals> Paper siz x opy. Finished Left/Right binding Top binding Check direction Check direction of original. Edge Left top Corner Finished BookR Duplex BookR Book Check direction book original top side direction to back. Bac Original Open from left/right Open from top Finished Open from left/right Open from top Check direction Check direction original top side d d Original Open from left Open from right Finished Book Duplex Book Book Check t top s 7 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start. Rear d <for -sided or -sided originals> <for open-faced originals> Paper s copy. If you set the originals in the optional Processor, copying will start automatically. If you set an original on the platen, a message will appear telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next step. Original Finished Check direc Check dire original. Original Finished Ba Che Se sid Left/Right binding Top binding Left/Right binding Top binding d d Left binding Right binding BookR Duplex BookR Book Edge ed 8 9 Replace the first original with the next one and press the [Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start. ce you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch the Scanning finished key. ing will start. 5-

48 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS. ing two-page originals onto separate sheets [Page separation/split copy modes] () Page separation/split copy from book originals With this mode, the two facing pages of an open-faced original such as a book, a magazine, and the like are each copied onto a separate sheet of paper. the originals to be copied. Touch the Function tab. The content of the Function tab will be displayed. S ly 8 /" x ", " x 7", A5R, B5R, AR, B and A size originals and " x 8 /" size copy paper can be used in this mode. Depending upon the size of the originals, the image will be enlarged or reduced to fit the size of the copy paper. Touch the sided/separation [ -sided/split ] key. The sided/separation [ -sided/split ] screen will be displayed. x8 /" ly A5R, B5R, AR, B, A, 8 /" x " and " x 7" size originals and A size copy paper can be used in this mode. Depending upon the size of the originals, the image will be enlarged or reduced to fit the size of the copy paper. paper Exposure mode Orig.image quality Sort/ Finished sided/ Separation Reduce /Enlarge Margin/ Centering Border Erase ion Page # Cover Mode Combine Batch scanning Forms Overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program (Asia Pacific) ly A5R, B5R, AR, B, A, 8 /" x " and " x 7" size originals and B5 or A size copy paper can be used in this mode. Depending upon the size of the originals, the image will be enlarged or reduced to fit the size of the copy paper. paper -sided/ Split size orig. Merge copy Exposure mode Reduce/ Enlarge selection Large # of originals Image quality Margin/ Imag. shift Page numbering Form overlay () Page separation/split copy from -sided originals Sort/ Finished Erase Mode Cover Mode Booklet Basic User choice Function Program With this mode, the two sides of a -sided original are each copied onto a separate sheet of paper. The Processor (option) must be installed on your copier in order to use this mode. 5-

49 Touch the sided / sided [ -sided / -sided ] key or the Book / sided [ Book / -sided ] key, as appropriate to the type of originals being copied and the type of finished copies to be made. x8 /" Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 6 Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel and verify the direction in which the originals were set. IMPORTANT! If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly. sided/separation sided sided sided sided Book sided sided sided sided sided Book sided Able to copy sided (separate) or sided copy using sided original, Book original or sided original. <for -sided or -sided originals> x8 /" Check direction Check direction of original top side. <for open-faced originals> x8 /" Check direction the book original top side direct to back. -sided / Split Rear Left top corner -sided R-sided -sided R-sided Book R-sided -sided R-sided -sided R-sided Book R-sided Able to copy -sided (separate) or -sided copy using -sided original, book original or -sided original. <for -sided or -sided originals> <for open-faced originals> 5 Specify the binding direction of the originals. Check direction Check direction of original. Check direction book original top side direction to back. <for -sided originals> ady to copy. <for open-faced originals> to copy. Edge Left top corner Separation Registe on Original Original d d d sided sided sided sided Book sided Open from left/right Open from top <for -sided originals> sided sided sided sided Book sided Open from left Open from right <for open-faced originals> to copy. 7 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start. If you set the originals in the optional Processor, copying will start automatically. If you set an original on the platen, a message will appear telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next step. ided / Split R Original Original ed sided ed sided k sided -sided R-sided -sided R-sided Book R-sided Left/Right binding Top binding -sided R-sided -sided R-sided Book R-sided Left binding Right binding 8 9 Replace the first original with the next one and press the [Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start. ce you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch the Scanning finished key. ing will start. 5-5

50 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS. Making a margin space on the copies [Margin mode] () Standard margin The image of the original can be shifted to the left or right and up or down to make a margin (blank) space on the copy. The width of each margin can be set to any /8" increment between /8" and /". A setting of 0 will leave no margin space. The image of the original can be shifted to the left or right and up or down to make a margin (blank) space on the copy. The width of each margin can be set to any mm increment between mm and 8 mm. A setting of 0 will leave no margin space. () Separate front and back margin settings When you are making -sided copies, the margin positions and widths can be selected separately for the front and back sides. The width of each margin can be set to any /8" increment between /8" and /". A setting of 0 will leave no margin space. When you are making -sided copies, the margin positions and widths can be selected separately for the front and back sides. The width of each margin can be set to any mm increment between mm and 8 mm. A setting of 0 will leave no margin space. A B B A the originals to be copied. IMPORTANT! originals so that the top edge is facing either the back or the left of the copier. ting them in the wrong direction may cause the margin to be created in the incorrect position. Touch the Function tab. The content of the Function tab will be displayed. S It is also possible for you to select the setting for the location and width of the margins. (See Margin width on page 7-80.) If you select to have a left margin created during -sided copying and the location for the back side margin is set to, a right margin that is the same width as the margin on the front side will be automatically created on the back side of the copies. Touch the Margin/Centering [ Margin/Imag.shift ] key. The Margin/Centering [ Margin/Image shift ] screen will be displayed. paper Exposure mode Orig.image quality Sort/ Finished sided/ Separation Reduce /Enlarge Margin/ Centering Border Erase ion Page # Cover Mode Combine Batch scanning Forms Overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program x8 /" paper Exposure mode Image quality Sort/ Finished -sided/ Split Reduce/ Enlarge Margin/ Imag. shift Erase Mode size orig. selection Page numbering Cover Mode Merge copy Large # of originals Form overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program 5-6

51 Touch the Margin key. The screen to set the front side margin will be displayed. Margin/Centering x8 /" Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 7 If you want to create a margin on the back side of the copies that lines up with that on the front side, touch the key. If you want to set the margins for the front and back sides separately, touch the Front/ margin key. The screen to set the back side margin will be displayed. x8 /" None Margin Centering Reposition image to left/right or top/bottom, and also center image on paper. page margin Check direction Check direction of original top side. Front/ margin If "AUTO" is selected for duplex copying, rear will have same margin setting as that for the front page. Rear Left top corner Margin/Image shift None Margin Image shift Reposition image to left/right or top/bottom and center image on paper. page margin Check direction Check direction of original. 5 Use the up/down and left/right cursor keys to select the desired location and width of each margin. Front/ margin If "AUTO" is selected at the duplex copying, back side will have same margin setting as that for the front page. Edge Left top corner Margin/Centering Front page None Margin (0~ /) Left / Centering " (0~ /) 0 " page margin x8 /" Check direction Check direction of original top side. Rear Left top corner 8 Use the up/down and left/right cursor keys to select the desired location and width of each margin. page margin x8 /" page (0~ /) 0 " Check direction Check direction of original top side. Front/ margin (0~ /) 0 " Rear Left top corner Margin/Image shift Front page Check direction Check direction of original. 6 None Margin Image shift Left page margin Edge Left top corner If you are making -sided copies, touch the page margin key. The page margin screen will be displayed. page margin Front/ margin page Check direction Check direction of original. Edge Left top corner x8 /" 9 Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel and verify the direction in which the originals were set. Margin/Centering None Margin Centering Front page (0~ /) Left / " Top (0~ /) / " page margin Check direction Check direction of original top side. Rear Left top corner IMPORTANT! If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly. 0 Press the [Start] key. ing will start. Margin/Image shift None Front page Top Check direction Check direction of original. Margin Image shift Left page margin Edge Left top corner 5-7

52 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS. Centering the copy image [Centering/Image shift mode] With this mode you can center the image on the copy paper when you copy onto a paper size that is larger than that of the original. Touch the Centering [ Imag.shift ] key. x8 /" Margin/Centering None Margin Reposition image to left/right or top/bottom, and also center image on paper. Centering IMPORTANT! the originals to be copied. Margin/Image shift None Margin Image shift Reposition image to left/right or top/bottom and center image on paper. originals so that the top edge is facing either the back or the left of the copier. ting them in the wrong direction may cause the image to be copied in the incorrect position. 5 Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel and verify the direction in which the originals were set. Touch the Function tab. The content of the Function tab will be displayed. Touch the Margin/Centering [ Margin/Imag.shift ] key. The Margin/Centering [ Margin/Image shift ] screen will be displayed. Margin/Centering None Margin Centering Able to center scanned image on paper. x8 /" Check direction Check direction of original top side. Rear Left top corner x8 /" paper Exposure mode sided/ Separation Reduce /Enlarge ion Combine Batch scanning Margin/Image shift Check direction Check direction of original. Orig.image quality Margin/ Centering Page # Forms Overlay None Sort/ Finished Border Erase Cover Mode Booklet Basic User choice Function Program Margin Image shift Able to center scanned image on paper. Edge Left top corner paper Exposure mode -sided/ Split Reduce/ Enlarge size orig. selection Merge copy Large # of originals IMPORTANT! If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly. Image quality Margin/ Imag. shift Page numbering Form overlay Sort/ Finished Erase Mode Cover Mode Booklet Basic User choice Function Program 6 Press the [Start] key. ing will start. 5-8

53 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 5. Adding a space next to the copy images for making notes [Memo mode] With this mode you can leave a space for adding notes next to the copied image. It is also possible to fit the images of originals onto the same copy page along with a blank space for each. ing one original onto one copy page (layout A) the originals to be copied. Touch the Function tab and then the N key. The content of the next portion of the Function tab will be displayed. Touch the Memo pages key. The Memo pages screen will be displayed. x8 /" Rotation OHP backing Proof Memo pages Eco Orig. set direction Invert Mirror Modify ing two originals onto one copy page (layout B) Basic User choice Function Program Rotation OHP back Test copy Memo pages Eco Orig. set direction Invert Mirror Modify copy Basic User choice Function Program ly 8 /" x ", " x 8 /", " x 7", B5R, B5, AR, A, B and A size copy paper can be used in this mode. Touch the Layout A key or the Layout B key, as appropriate. The screen to make the layout settings will be displayed. Memo pages Layout x8 /" 50% Border line Check direction Check direction of None original top side. None Solid Layout A Dotted Layout B Borders Rear Left top corner Memo pages Layout Border line None Check direction Check direction of original. None Solid Layout A Dotted Layout B Cropmark Edge Left top corner 5-9

54 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 5 the desired direction of the layout. to copy. <Layout A> <Layout B> to copy. Layout Border line Layout Border line None None Solid Solid Dotted Dotted Borders Borders <Layout A> <Layout B> to copy. to copy. Layout Border line Layout Border line None None Solid Solid Dotted Dotted Cropmark Cropmark 6 7 the type of the borderline that you want to use to separate the different areas. Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start. If you set the originals in the optional Processor, copying will start automatically. If you set an original on the platen, a message will appear telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next step. 8 9 Replace the first original with the next one and press the [Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start. ce you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch the Scanning finished key. ing will start. 5-0

55 6. Making copies with clean edges [Border erase modes] Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS () Erasing blemishes from edges of copies (Sheet erase mode) With this mode, shadows, lines, etc., that occur around the edges of copies made from sheet originals can be erased. A border of equal width will be erased around all sides of the copied image. The width of the border to be erased can be set to any /8" increment between /8" and /". A setting of 0 will result in no border being erased. (The areas that will be erased are shown as a in the illustration.) With this mode, shadows, lines, etc., that occur around the edges of copies made from sheet originals can be erased. A border of equal width will be erased around all sides of the copied image. The width of the border to be erased can be set to any mm increment between mm and 8 mm. A setting of 0 will result in no border being erased. (The areas that will be erased are shown as a in the illustration.) () Erasing blemishes from the edges and middle of copies made from books (Book erase mode) With this mode, you can make clean copies, even from thick books. The width of the outside border to be erased can be set to any /8" increment between /8" and /". The width of the center area to be erased can be set to any /8" increment between /8" and /". A setting of 0 will result in no border being erased. (The area that will be erased as the outside border is shown as a in the illustration, while that of the center area is shown as b.) With this mode, you can make clean copies, even from thick books. The width of the outside border to be erased can be set to any mm increment between mm and 8 mm. The width of the center area to be erased can be set to any mm increment between mm and 6 mm. A setting of 0 will result in no border being erased. (The area that will be erased as the outside border is shown as a in the illustration, while that of the center area is shown as b.) a a a abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk b a abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk abcdefghijk It is possible for you to change the setting for the width of the erased border. (See Erased border width on page 7-8.) It is possible for you to change the setting for the width of the erased borders. (See Erased border width on page 7-8.) 5-

56 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS () Erasing blemishes from the edges of copies using individual border settings (Individual border erase mode) With this mode, shadows, lines, etc., that occur around the edges of copies made from sheet originals can be erased, but in this case you can designate separate widths for each of the top, bottom, left and right borders. The width of each border to be erased can be set to any /8" increment between 0 and ". (The area that will be erased as the top border is shown as a, the bottom border is shown as b, the left border as c, and the right border as d, in the illustration.) With this mode, shadows, lines, etc., that occur around the edges of copies made from sheet originals can be erased, but in this case you can designate separate widths for each of the top, bottom, left and right borders. The width of each border to be erased can be set to any mm increment between 0 and 50 mm. (The area that will be erased as the top border is shown as a, the bottom border is shown as b, the left border as c, and the right border as d, in the illustration.) the original to be copied. Touch the Function tab. The content of the Function tab will be displayed. Touch the Border Erase [ Erase Mode ] key. The Border Erase [ Erase Mode ] screen will be displayed. x8 /" paper Exposure mode Orig.image quality Sort/ Finished sided/ Separation Reduce /Enlarge Margin/ Centering Border Erase ion Page # Cover Mode Combine Batch scanning Forms Overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program The settings for the border widths are the same values as that set for the sheet erase mode. paper Exposure mode Image quality Sort/ Finished -sided/ Split Reduce/ Enlarge Margin/ Imag. shift Erase Mode size orig. selection Page numbering Cover Mode Merge copy Large # of originals Form overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program If you want to select the sheet erase mode or the book erase mode, go to the next step. If you want to select the individual border erase mode, go directly to step 6. 5-

57 Touch the Sheet Erase [ Border erase ] key or the Book Erase key, as appropriate. The screen to set the outside border and the center area will be displayed. Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 6 Touch the Individual BordrErase [ Individual Erase Mode ] key. The screen to set the top, bottom, left or right border will be displayed. x8 /" x8 /" Border Erase Border Erase None Sheet Erase Book Erase Individual BordrErase Erase the border shadow of original or shadow from centor of book. None Sheet Erase Book Erase Individual BordrErase Erase the border shadow of original or shadow from centor of book. Erase Mode Erase Mode None Border erase Book erase Individual Erase Mode Erase edge of original or center of book and copy. None Border erase Book erase Individual Erase Mode Erase edge of original or center of book and copy. 5 Touch the + key or the key to change the displayed border width to that desired. * In metric specification copiers, the desired border width can also be entered directly by touching the #-Keys key and then using the keypad. 7 Touch the key that corresponds to the border whose width you want to change. The screen to set that border width will be displayed. x8 /" Border Erase (0~ /) (0~ /) x8 /" Border Erase None Top " " Bottom Check direction Check direction of original top side. None Sheet Erase Book Erase Individual BordrErase Border / " Center / " Sheet Erase Book Erase Individual BordrErase Left " " Right Rear Left top corner Erase Mode None Border erase Book erase Individual Erase Mode Border (0~8) (0~6) #-Keys 6 Center #-Keys Erase Mode None Border erase Book erase Individual Erase Mode Check direction 6 mm 6 mm Check direction of original. Top Bottom Left 6 mm 6 mm Right Edge Left top Corner Go directly to step

58 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 8 Touch the + key or the key to change the displayed border width to that desired. * In metric specification copiers, the desired border width can also be entered directly by touching the #-Keys key and then using the keypad. x8 /" Individual Border Erase Top (0~) / " Check direction Check direction of original top side. Rear Left top corner Individual Erase Mode Top (0~50) 6 Check direction Check direction of original. #-Keys Edge Left top Corner 9 0 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 7. If you want to change the width of any of the other borders, repeat steps 7 through 9. Press the [Start] key. ing will start. 5--

59 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 7. Fitting the image of either two or four originals onto a single copy page [Combine/Merge modes] With this mode, the images from either or originals can be reduced and then combined onto a single copy. The borderline of each original can also be marked with either a solid line or a dotted line. () in Use this mode when you want to copy four originals onto one sheet. This mode can also be used in conjunction with the -sided copy modes in order to copy eight originals onto one sheet. (When setting the originals on the platen, be sure to set the originals in the correct order:,, and then.) ly 8 /" x ", " x 8 /", " x 7", B5R, B5, AR, A, B and A size copy paper can be used in this mode. () in Use this mode when you want to copy two originals onto one sheet. This mode can also be used in conjunction with the -sided copy modes in order to copy four originals onto one sheet. (When setting the originals on the platen, be sure to set the originals in the correct order: and then.) 5-

60 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS the originals to be copied. Touch the Function tab. The content of the Function tab will be displayed. Touch the in [ -in- ] key or the in [ -in- ] key, as appropriate. The screen to make the layout settings will be displayed. x8 /" Paper Size x8 /" Combine x8 /" 8 /x" Color x8 /" x8 /" Recycled APS Exposure Exposure mode AMS Reduce /Enlarge Basic User choice Function Program Sort: Sort: Sort/ Finished Combine Orig.image quality Reduce /Enlarge None or original pages can combine on one page. Paper Size Merge copy Merge copy Colour APS Exposure AMS Sort: Sort: Image quality Reduce/ Enlarge None -in- -in- or originals can be printed on one page. Recycled Exposure mode Reduce/ Enlarge Sort/ Finished Basic User choice Function Program Touch the Combine [ Merge copy ] key. The Combine [ Merge copy ] screen will be displayed. 5 the desired direction of the layout. to copy. to copy. x8 /" Layout Border line None Layout Border line None paper Exposure mode Orig.image quality Sort/ Finished sided/ Separation Reduce /Enlarge Margin/ Centering Border Erase ion Page # Cover Mode Combine Batch scanning Forms Overlay Booklet Solid Dotted Borders Solid Dotted Borders Basic User choice Function Program to copy. to copy. Layout Border line None Layout Border line None paper Exposure mode -sided/ Split Reduce/ Enlarge size orig. selection Merge copy Large # of originals Solid Dotted Cropmark Solid Dotted Cropmark Image quality Margin/ Imag. shift Page numbering Form overlay Sort/ Finished Erase Mode Cover Mode Booklet Basic User choice Function Program 6 the type of the borderline that you want to use to separate the images. 5-

61 7 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start. Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS If you set the originals in the optional Processor, copying will start automatically. If you set an original on the platen, a message will appear telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next step. 8 9 Replace the first original with the next one and press the [Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start. ce you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch the Scanning finished key. ing will start. 5-5

62 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 8. ing page numbers on copies [ page numbers mode] When you make copies from multiple originals, you can have page numbers printed on the corresponding copies in numerical order from the first original. There are three styles of page numbers to choose from: --, P. and /n. * If you select /n as the style of page numbers, the denominator will indicate the total number of pages. A B C D E A B C D E Touch the Page # [ Page numbering ] key. The Page # [ Page numbering ] screen will be displayed. paper Exposure mode Orig.image quality Sort/ Finished sided/ Separation Reduce /Enlarge Margin/ Centering Border Erase ion Page # Cover Mode Combine Batch scanning Forms Overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program x8 /" A B C D E A B C D E paper Exposure mode Image quality Sort/ Finished -sided/ Split Reduce/ Enlarge Margin/ Imag. shift Erase Mode size orig. selection Page numbering Cover Mode Merge copy Large # of originals Form overlay Booklet A B C D E P. P. P. P. P.5 A B C D E /5 /5 /5 /5 5/5 Basic User choice Function Program Touch the key that corresponds to the style of page numbers that you want to use. The screen to make settings for that style will be displayed. x8 /" Page # None Page # can be added on bottom of copy. Page numbers will be printed relative to the middle of the bottom of the page. (The arrow in the illustration indicates the direction in which the originals are set.) Page numbering Abcde -- Abcde -- None -- P. /n Page # can be added on bottom of copy. Abcde Abcde the originals to be copied. Touch the Function tab. The content of the Function tab will be displayed. 5-6

63 5 If you want printing of the page numbers to be started from a page other than the first page, touch the ting st page key. The ting st page screen will be displayed. Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 8 If you want the first page number that is printed to be something other than, touch the ting start # [ ting Start page ] key. The ting start # screen will be displayed. x8 /" x8 /" Page # Page # None Start page # ting st page Finish Page # Start # ting start # Denominator # Check direction Check direction of original top side. None Start page # ting st page Finish Page # Start # ting start # Denominator # Check direction Check direction of original top side. Last page ting last page denominator # Rear Left top corner Last page ting last page denominator # Rear Left top corner Page numbering Page numbering None -- P. /n Start page # Start # ting st page Last page # Last page ting last page ting Start page Denominator # Denomin. # Check direction Check direction of original. Edge Left top corner None -- P. /n Start page # Start # ting st page Last page # Last page ting last page ting Start page Denominator # Denomin. # Check direction Check direction of original. Edge Left top corner 6 Touch the + key or the - key to select from which page printing of the page numbers will start. x8 /" 9 Touch the + key or the - key to select the first page number that will be printed. * The desired page number can also be entered directly by touching the # keys [ #-Keys ] key and then using the keypad. ting st page Page Check direction Check direction of original top side. 8 /x" + ting start # Rear Left top corner + # keys Check direction Check direction of original top side. Rear Left top corner ting st page Page Check direction Check direction of original. ting start # Edge Left top corner Check direction Check direction of original. 7 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 5. #-Keys Edge Left top corner 0 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step

64 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS If you want the last page number that is printed to be on a copy other than that for the last original, touch the ting last page key. The ting last page screen will be displayed. Page # None Page numbering None -- P. /n Start page # ting st page Finish Page # Last page ting last page Start # ting start # Denominator # denominator # Start page # Start # ting st page Last page # Last page ting last page ting Start page Denominator # Denomin. # x8 /" Check direction Check direction of original top side. Rear Left top corner Check direction Check direction of original. Edge Left top corner Touch the + key or the - key to select, counting from the final copy, how many pages you do NOT want to have page numbers printed on. ting last page Last page Manual + ting last page Last page Manual Page Page x8 /" Check direction Check direction of original top side. Rear Left top corner Check direction Check direction of original. Edge Left top corner Touch the Manual key. The screen to designate the last page will be displayed. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. If you selected the /n style, the denominator # [ Denomin. # ] key will be displayed. ting last page x8 /" Check direction Check direction of original top side. 5 If you want to manually select the denominator for the page numbers, touch the denominator # [ Denomin. # ] key. The ting denominator # screen will be displayed. Last page Manual Rear Left top corner x8 /" Page # None Start page # ting st page Finish Page # Start # ting start # Denominator # Check direction Check direction of original top side. ting last page Check direction Check direction of original. Last page ting last page denominator # Rear Left top corner Last page Manual Edge Left top corner Page numbering None P. -- /n Start page # Start # ting st page Last page # Last page ting last page ting Start page Denominator # Denomin. # Check direction Check direction of original. Edge Left top corner 5-8

65 6 Touch the Manual key. The screen to designate the denominator will be displayed. Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 8 Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel and verify the direction in which the originals were set. x8 /" x8 /" x8 /" ting denominator # Manual Check direction Check direction of original top side. Rear Left top corner Finished Open from left/right Open from top Check direction Check direction of original top side. Rear Left top corner Finished Book Duplex Book Book Check direction the book original top side direct to back. ting denominator # Check direction Check direction of original. Manual Edge Left top corner Finished Left/Right binding Top binding Check direction Check direction of original. Edge Left top Corner Finished BookR Duplex BookR Book Check direction book original top side direction to back. 7 Touch the + key or the - key to select the desired denominator for the page numbers. * The desired denominator can also be entered directly by touching the # keys [ #-Keys ] key and then using the keypad. 9 Press the [Start] key. ing will start. 8 /x" ting denominator # Manual + # keys Check direction Check direction of original top side. Rear Left top corner ting denominator # Check direction Check direction of original. Manual #-Keys Edge Left top corner 5-9

66 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 9. Overlaying one image over another [Form overlay mode] This mode can be used to scan the first original (the form ) into memory and have its image overlaid onto copies made from subsequent originals. If the optional Hard Disk is installed on your copier, it is also possible to register and store in memory, in advance, the images that you want to use as original forms. Touch the key. The screen to set the shading level of the form image will be displayed. x8 /" Forms Overlay A B C A B C Overlay first scanned image onto the scanned image or on registered from. Form overlay Refer to () Form registration on page 6- for the procedure to register images as forms. Of Overlay st image on the scanned image or on registered form. Touch the Function tab. The content of the Function tab will be displayed. Touch the Forms Overlay [ Form overlay ] key. The Forms Overlay [ Form overlay ] screen will be displayed. Touch the + key or the - key to select the level of shading that you want to use for the original form. The desired shading level can be set to any 0% increment between 0% and 00%. *A sample of the effect that the selected shading level will produce will be displayed to the right of the entry field. Place from first then press start. x8 /" Forms Overlay (0~00) paper Exposure mode Orig.image quality Sort/ Finished sided/ Separation Reduce /Enlarge Margin/ Centering Border Erase ion Page # Cover Mode Combine Batch scanning Forms Overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program Exposure 50 % Scan form once Form ed form. Press Start Key. Form overlay (0 00) paper Exposure mode Image quality -sided/ Split Reduce/ Enlarge Margin/ Imag. shift size orig. selection Page numbering Merge copy Large # of originals Form overlay Exposure 50 % Scan form once Form selection Sort/ Finished Erase Mode Cover Mode Booklet Basic User choice Function Program 5 If the optional Hard Disk is installed on your copier, it is also possible to register and store in memory, in advance, the images that you want to use as original forms. If you want to use a previously registered image as the form, touch the Form ed [ Form selection ] key and go to the next step. If you want to scan in a new image, go directly to step

67 6 Touch the Loading Form key. A list of registered forms will be displayed. Form Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 9 If you are using the optional Processor, make sure that the original that you want to use as the form is on top of the originals that you want to copy. If you are using the platen, set the original that you want to use as the form. Scan form once Loading Form Overlay first scanned image onto the scanned image or on registered from. 0 Press the [Start] key. ing will start. If a message appears telling you to set the next original, go to the next step. y Form selection form. Press Start key. Form selection Replace the first original with the next one and press the [Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start. Scan form once Loading Form Overlay st image on the scanned image or on registered form. ce you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch the Scanning finished key. ing will start. 7 from that list the image that you want to use and then touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Form Form Form 005 x8 /" 600dpi Scan form once Loading Form Form 00 Form 00 Form 00 Form 00 x8 /" 8 /x" x8 /" x8 /" The arrow means direction of registered form. original and form directions. Form selection Scan form once Loading Form Form Form006 Form005 Form00 Form00 Form00 600dpi The arrow means direction of registered form. original and form directions. 8 the originals that you want to copy and go directly to step 0. 5-

68 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 0. Making booklets from sheet originals [Booklet/Stitching mode] With this mode, you can use -sided or -sided originals to make open-faced, two-sided copies in such a way that the finished copies can be stacked and folded into a booklet format. You can also select to have color paper or relatively thick paper fed as front and/or back covers to the copy sets. If Top is selected as the binding direction... ing will be performed so that the stacked and folded pages of the finished copies read from top to bottom. S ly 8 /" x ", " x 8 /", " x 7", B5R, B5, AR, A, B and A size copy paper can be used in this mode. It is possible for you to change the drawer[cassette] that will be used to feed the cover sheets. (See Cover drawer[cassette] on page 7-7.) If the optional Finisher with Center Bind & Fold Unit is installed on your copier, you will be able to select center binding (stapling) and folding. ly 8 /" x " and " x 7" size copy paper can be center folded and stapled. If the optional Finisher with Center Bind & Fold Unit is installed on your copier, you will be able to select center binding (stapling) and folding. ly AR, B and A size copy paper can be center folded and stapled It is possible for you to select whether or not to copy onto the front and/or back cover sheets. Front cover cover Do NOT copy a b a b on outside on inside If Left is selected as the binding direction... ing will be performed so that the stacked and folded pages of the finished copies read from left to right. If Right is selected as the binding direction... ing will be performed so that the stacked and folded pages of the finished copies read from right to left. on both sides S The asterisk indicates the side of the cover on which copying will be accomplished. The illustrations above are an example of when Left is selected as the binding direction. 5 5-

69 the first original to be copied. Touch the Function tab. The content of the Function tab will be displayed. Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 5 Specify the binding direction of both the originals and the finished copies. sided mode. x8 /" Touch the Booklet key. The Booklet screen will be displayed. x8 /" Booklet None Booklet Book Booklet Original sided -sided Left/Right -sided Top/Bottom Finishing Open from left Open from right Open from top Stitching Stitching Front cvr None Saddle Stitch Check direction Check direction of original top side. Rear Left top corner paper sided/ Separation Combine Exposure mode Orig.image quality Sort/ Finished Reduce /Enlarge Margin/ Centering Border Erase ion Page # Cover Mode Batch scanning Forms Overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program Duplex Mode. Booklet Original Finished Stitching Check direction Check direction of original. None Booklet Book RBooklet -sided -sided Left/Right -sided Top/Bottom Left binding Right binding Top binding Stitching Front cov. None Center Staple Edge Left top corner paper Exposure mode Image quality Sort/ Finished -sided/ Split Reduce/ Enlarge Margin/ Imag. shift Erase Mode size orig. selection Page numbering Cover Mode Merge copy Large # of originals Form overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program 6 If It is impossible to copy in present setting mode. Change setting of original and finishing mode. appears, check (on the right side of the touch panel) whether both the orientation of the originals and the finish mode setting are correct or not. Touch the Booklet key. The screen to specify the binding direction of the originals and the finished copies will be displayed. Booklet x8 /" It is impossible to copy in present setting mode. Change setting of original and finishing mode. Booklet None Booklet Book Booklet Original sided -sided Left/Right -sided Top/Bottom Finishing Open from left Open from right Open from top Stitching Stitching Front cvr None Saddle Stitch x8 /" Check direction Check direction of original top side. Rear Left top corner None Booklet Edit one or two sided original pages and out put a book. Use Book-booklet for book original. It is impossible to copy in present setting mode. Change setting of original and finishing mode. Book Booklet Booklet Booklet None Booklet Book RBooklet Original -sided -sided Left/Right -sided Top/Bottom Finished Left binding Right binding Top binding Stitching Stitching Front cov. None Center Staple Check direction Check direction of original. Edge Left top corner None Booklet Edit - and -sided originals and output as book. Use BookRbooklet for book original. Book RBooklet 5-

70 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 7 If the optional Finisher with Center Bind & Fold Unit is installed on your copier, the Saddle Stitch [ Center Staple ] key will be displayed and you will be able to select center binding (stapling) and folding of the copy sets. In this case, if you DO want the center stapling and folding operation to be performed, touch the Saddle Stitch [ Center Staple ] key and go to the next step. If you do NOT want the stapling and folding operation to be performed, go directly to step 9. sided mode. Booklet Original Finishing Stitching x8 /" Check direction Check direction of original top side. 9 If you want to add covers, touch the Stitching Front cvr [ Stitching Front cov. ] key and go to the next step. If you do NOT want to add covers, go directly to step. sided mode. Booklet None Booklet Book Booklet Original sided -sided Left/Right -sided Top/Bottom Duplex Mode. Finishing Open from left Open from right Open from top Stitching Stitching Front cvr None Saddle Stitch x8 /" Check direction Check direction of original top side. Rear Left top corner None Booklet Book Booklet sided -sided Left/Right -sided Top/Bottom Duplex Mode. Open from left Open from right Open from top Stitching Front cvr None Saddle Stitch Rear Left top corner Booklet None Booklet Book RBooklet Original -sided -sided Left/Right -sided Top/Bottom Finished Left binding Right binding Top binding Stitching Stitching Front cov. None Center Staple Check direction Check direction of original. Edge Left top corner Booklet None Booklet Book RBooklet Original -sided -sided Left/Right -sided Top/Bottom Finished Left binding Right binding Top binding Stitching Stitching Front cov. None Center Staple Check direction Check direction of original. Edge Left top corner 0 Touch the Cover key and select whether or not (and where) to copy on each of the front and back covers. sided mode. x8 /" 8 Touch the Bind & Fold key. * It is possible for you to center staple and fold, up to 0 copy sheets (0 layout pages) at one time. Front cover No cover Blank Front cover copy Blank Rear cover copy Cover Front copy sided copy Front copy sided copy sided mode. Pape 8 /x" 00% Saddle Stitch Duplex Mode. Bind & Fold Stitch. front cover. Front cover cover No cover Blank copy Blank copy Cover Front copy -sided copy Front copy -sided copy Duplex Mode. Saddle Stitch Bind & Fold 5-

71 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start. Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS If you set the originals in the optional Processor, copying will start automatically. If you set an original on the platen, a message will appear telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next step. Replace the first original with the next one and press the [Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start. ce you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch the Scanning finished key. ing will start. 5-5

72 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS. Making booklets from book originals [Book to Booklet mode] With this mode, you can add covers, and either copy onto them or not, so that the finished copy sets will appear like a magazine, etc. S ly 8 /" x ", " x 8 /", " x 7", A5R, B5R, AR, B and A size originals and 8 /" x ", " x 8 /", " x 7", B5R, B5, AR, A, B and A size copy paper can be used in this mode. It is possible for you to change the drawer[cassette] that will be used to feed the cover sheets. (See Cover drawer[cassette] on page 7-7.) If the optional Finisher with Center Bind & Fold Unit is installed on your copier, you will be able to select center binding (stapling) and folding. ly 8 /" x " and " x 7" size copy paper can be center folded and stapled. If the optional Finisher with Center Bind & Fold Unit is installed on your copier, you will be able to select center binding (stapling) and folding. ly AR, B and A size copy paper can be center folded and stapled. With a cover The original that will be used as the cover will be scanned first so that, when the finished copies are folded, that page will act as the front and back cover to the copy set. A B 6 5 A B Without a cover When the finished copies are folded, the front and back of the copy set will be blank. 6 5 AB AB AB the open-faced (book, etc.) original to be copied. Touch the Function tab. The content of the Function tab will be displayed. 5-6

73 Touch the Booklet key. The Booklet screen will be displayed. Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 5 Specify the binding direction of both the originals and the finished copies. x8 /" first page. Press "Start" key. x8 /" paper Exposure mode sided/ Separation Reduce /Enlarge ion Combine Batch scanning Booklet Original Finishing front Check direction the book original top side direct to back. Orig.image quality Sort/ Finished Margin/ Centering Border Erase Page # Cover Mode Forms Overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program None Booklet Book Booklet Book Left Book Right Open from left Open from right on front cvr None Saddle Stitch first page. Press "START" button. paper Exposure mode -sided/ Split Reduce/ Enlarge size orig. selection Merge copy Large # of originals Booklet Original Finished front Check direction book original top side direction to back. Image quality Sort/ Finished Margin/ Imag. shift Erase Mode Page numbering Cover Mode Form overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program None Booklet Book RBooklet Book Left Book Right Left binding Right binding on front cov. None Center Staple Touch the Book / Booklet key. The screen to specify the binding direction of the originals and the finished copies will be displayed. Booklet x8 /" 6 If the optional Finisher with Center Bind & Fold Unit is installed on your copier, the Saddle Stitch [ Center Staple ] key will be displayed and you will be able to select center binding (stapling) and folding of the copy sets. In this case, if you DO want the center stapling and folding operation to be performed, touch the Saddle Stitch [ Center Staple ] key and go to the next step. None Booklet Book Booklet Booklet None Booklet Book RBooklet Edit one or two sided original pages and out put a book. Use Book-booklet for book original. Edit - and -sided originals and output as book. Use BookRbooklet for book original. If you do NOT want the stapling and folding operation to be performed, go directly to step 8. first page. Press "Start" key. Booklet None Booklet Book Booklet Book Left Book Right first page. Press "START" button. Open from left Open from right front on front cvr None Saddle Stitch x8 /" Original Finishing Check direction the book original top side direct to back. Booklet None Booklet Book RBooklet Original Finished front Book Left Book Right Left binding Right binding on front cov. None Center Staple Check direction book original top side direction to back. 5-7

74 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 7 Touch the Bind & Fold key. * It is possible for you to center staple and fold, up to 0 copy sheets (0 layout pages) at one time. 9 Touch the key. first page. Press "Start" key. x8 /" first page. Pape Press "Start" key. 8 /x" 00% Saddle Stitch Bind & Fold on front cover When selecting "ON" for copying on the front cover, follow the instruction.. Scan front cover book original. Start scan book originals Check direction the book original top side direct to back. first page. Press "START" button. first page. Press "START" button. Saddle Stitch on front cover When selecting "ON" for copying on the front cover, follow the instruction.. Scan front cover book original.. Start scan book originals. Check direction book original top side direction to back. Bind & Fold 8 If you want to add covers, touch the on front cvr [ on front cov. ] key. The on front cover screen will be displayed. At this point, if you do NOT want to copy onto the covers, go directly to step 0. first page. Press "Start" key. x8 /" IMPORTANT! If you DO want to copy onto the covers, be absolutely certain to set the original that you want to have copied onto the cover first. 0 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the original will start. Booklet Original Finishing front Check direction the book original top side direct to back. When a message appears telling you to set the next original, go to the next step. None Booklet Book Booklet Book Left Book Right Open from left Open from right on front cvr None Saddle Stitch first page. Press "START" button. Booklet Original Finished front Check direction book original top side direction to back. None Booklet Book RBooklet Book Left Book Right Left binding Right binding on front cov. None Center Staple Replace the first original with the next one and press the [Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start. ce you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch the Scanning finished key. ing will start. 5-8

75 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS. matic sorting of copy sets without the Finisher [Sort/Finished mode] Since copying in this mode is performed after multiple originals are scanned and memorized, copies can be sorted into the required number of sets even without the optional Finisher. Touch the Sort/Finished key. The Sort/Finished screen will be displayed. When Sort:ON and [ set ] are selected paper Exposure mode sided/ Separation Reduce /Enlarge ion Combine Batch scanning x8 /" Orig.image quality Sort/ Finished Margin/ Centering Border Erase Page # Cover Mode Forms Overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program When Sort:OFF and [ Output each page ] are selected paper Exposure mode Image quality -sided/ Split Reduce/ Enlarge Margin/ Imag. shift size orig. selection Page numbering Merge copy Large # of originals Form overlay Sort/ Finished Erase Mode Cover Mode Booklet Basic User choice Function Program Touch the Sort:ON key. x8 /" (when there is paper loaded of the same size but different orientation) Sort/Finished Sort set Sort: Sort: Rear S If you do not have paper of the same size but different orientations available for paper feed, copies will be ejected without being sorted in this way. You can also select whether or not the Sort and/or the Finished modes will be the setting in the initial mode. (See Sort/ Finished mode ON/OFF on page 7-78.) Sort/Finished Sort Group Sort: Sort: set the originals to be copied. 5 Touch the [ set ] key. Touch the Function tab. The content of the Function tab will be displayed. 6 Use the keypad to set the number of copies to be made. 7 Press the [Start] key. ing will start. 5-9

76 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS. rotation function If the orientation of the original is different from that of the paper loaded in the drawers[cassettes], the image will be automatically turned 90 degrees counter-clockwise for copying. No special setting is required in order to use this function. Touch the Rotation key. The Rotation screen will be displayed. x8 /" Rotation OHP backing Proof Memo pages Eco Orig. set direction Invert Mirror Modify Basic User choice Function Program Rotation OHP back Test copy Memo pages Eco Orig. set direction Invert Mirror S Modify copy This function will only work with 5 /" x 8 /", 8 /" x ", " x 8 /", A6R, B6R, A5R, B5R, B5, AR and A size copy paper. You can also select whether or not the Rotation mode will be the setting in the initial mode. (See Rotation mode ON/ OFF on page 7-79.) Basic User choice Function Program Touch the No Rotate key. x8 /" If you want to disengage the auto rotation function, perform the following procedure. Rotation Touch the Function tab and then the key. The content of the next portion of the Function tab will be displayed. No Rotate Rotate When original and paper have different direction, image will be rotated. Rotation No rotate Rotate When original and paper have different direction, original will be rotated automatically. 5-0

77 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS. Adding a front and/or back cover to your copy sets [Cover mode] With this mode, you can select to have color paper or relatively thick paper fed as front and/or back covers to your copy sets. It is possible for you to change the drawer[cassette] that will be used to feed the cover sheets. (See Cover drawer[cassette] on page 7-7.) You can select separately whether you want both sides or only one side of both the front and back covers to be copied onto, or to have either or both of them left completely blank. also whether or not you even want to include a back cover at all. Front cover cover sided copy[duplex ]* Front copy copy* Blank No back cover * The illustrations above show the result when sets of -sided copies are being made. If you are making sets of -sided copies, copying will not be performed on the rear side of the covers even if the -sided copy [Duplex ] or copy settings are selected. 5-

78 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS the originals to be copied. Touch the Function tab. The content of the Function tab will be displayed. 5 the desired settings for the front cover. Cover Mode x8 /" Touch the Cover Mode key. The Cover Mode screen will be displayed. Front cover No cover Cover Blank Front copy copy sided copy Rear cover No cover Cover paper Exposure mode sided/ Separation Reduce /Enlarge ion Combine Batch scanning x8 /" Orig.image quality Sort/ Finished Margin/ Centering Border Erase Page # Cover Mode Forms Overlay Booklet Cover Mode Front cover cover Basic User choice Function Program No cover Blank copy No cover Cover Front copy Duplex Cover paper Exposure mode Image quality Sort/ Finished -sided/ Split Reduce/ Enlarge Margin/ Imag. shift Erase Mode size orig. selection Page numbering Cover Mode Merge copy Large # of originals Form overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program 6 Touch the Cover key or the No cover key, as appropriate, to select whether or not you want to include a back cover. If you selected Cover, the screen to make the back cover settings will be displayed. Touch the Cover key. The screen to make the front cover settings will be displayed. Cover Mode Front cover Rear cover x8 /" x8 /" No cover Cover Blank Front copy copy sided copy No cover Cover Cover Mode Front cover No cover Cover Insert Color or Thick, etc paper as a front/back cover. Able to copy on same paper. the cover paper for specify drawer. Cover Mode Front cover cover No cover Cover Blank Front copy copy Duplex No cover Cover Cover Mode Front cover No cover Cover Insert front & back cover paper (Colour/ Thick etc...) to head & end of copy. cover paper in dedignated paper cassette. 7 the desired settings for the back cover. x8 /" Cover Mode Front cover Rear cover No cover Cover Blank Front copy copy sided copy No cover Cover Blank Front copy copy sided copy Cover Mode Front cover cover No cover Blank copy No cover Blank copy Cover Front copy Duplex Cover Front copy Duplex 5-

79 8 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start. Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS If you set the originals in the optional Processor, copying will start automatically. If you set an original on the platen, a message will appear telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next step. 9 0 Replace the first original with the next one and press the [Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start. ce you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch the Scanning finished key. ing will start. 5-

80 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 5. Original size selection mode With this mode, if you manually select a size for the original, only that size image will be scanned for copying. Use this mode as well when copying from originals of non-standard sizes. Touch the [ size orig. ] key. The original size [ size original ] screen will be displayed. x8 /" paper sided/ Separation Combine A B C 8 /" x " A Exposure mode Orig.image quality Sort/ Finished Reduce /Enlarge Margin/ Centering Border Erase ion Page # Cover Mode Batch scanning Forms Overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program S You can register the size of non-standard originals that you often use as a custom original size. (See. Original size registration on page 7-90.) ALWAYS set non-standard sized originals on the platen. ce you select the original size under this mode, you can copy with originals set on the platen even with the optional Processor open. If this mode is used in combination with the Centering/Image shift mode, you can, for example, have the image of non-standard sized originals centered on standard sized copy paper. (See. Centering/ Image shift mode on page 5-8.) paper Exposure mode Image quality Sort/ Finished -sided/ Split Reduce/ Enlarge Margin/ Imag. shift Erase Mode size orig. selection Page numbering Cover Mode Merge copy Large # of originals Form overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program the size of the originals. If you want to select a standard scanning size, touch the key that corresponds to the desired size and then go directly to step 9. If you want to select a standard size other than those displayed, go to the next step. If you want to select the dimensions of the scan area manually, go directly to step 7. the originals to be copied. Touch the Function tab. The content of the Function tab will be displayed. original size size Input size Other stand. Size x8 /" User regist. x 7" 8 / x " x 8 /" 8 / x " 5 / x 8 /" Cardstock 8 / x 5 /" x 5" A A 5 / x 5 /" 8 / x 8 /" x " 9 x 9" size original Use regist 00X00mm size 50X50mm Input size 00X00mm Others stand. Size Folio 0X0mm If you have registered a custom original size, you will be able to select that size for use in this mode. (See. Original size registration on page 7-90.) 5-

81 5 6 Touch the Other stand. Size [ Others stand.size ] key. the size of the originals and then proceed to step 9. Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS x8 /" original size A B B5 8K size A5 B5 Folio 6K Input size A5 B5 8 / x " Other stand. Size A6 B6 P. Card size original x 7" 8 / x " size Input size Others stand. Size 8 / x " 5 / x 8 /" 8 / x 5 /" Pstcard 8K 6K 7 8 Touch the Input size key. The screen to set the dimensions of the scan area will be displayed. Based on the left rear corner of the platen being a setting of 0, touch the + key or the - key to change the dimensions of the scan area to the desired setting. * In metric specification copiers, the dimensions can also be entered directly by touching the #-Keys key and then using the keypad. Paper Size x8 /" original size 5 /8 7 " " size Input size Other stand. Size original on platen and input scanning range. (Y side, X side) size original size Input size Scanning range can be set with X-Y direction when original is placed at left rear corner. Others stand. Size #-Keys #-Keys 9 Press the [Start] key. ing will start. 5-5

82 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 6. Feeding paper as a backing sheet for OHP transparencies [Transparency + backing sheet mode] When or transparencies are piled on top of one another, static electricity can cause problems. This mode automatically places a backing sheet between the transparencies during copying for easy handling. You can also select whether or not to have the image of the original copied onto the backing sheet, or even make multiple copies from the same original. the originals to be copied. the transparency film on the multi-bypass tray. IMPORTANT! When copying onto transparencies, ALWAYS use the multi-bypass tray. B A IMPORTANT! Fan through the transparencies before setting them. to 5 transparencies can be set on the multi-bypass tray at one time. Make sure that paper of the same size and orientation as the transparencies has been loaded into a drawer[cassette]. ing onto the backing sheet With this setting, after the original is copied onto the transparency, the same image will be copied onto the backing sheet as well. (The asterisk * in the illustration indicates the transparencies.) Touch the Function tab and then the key. The content of the next portion of the Function tab will be displayed. Touch the OHP backing [ OHP back ] key. The OHP backing [ OHP back ] screen will be displayed. x8 /" Rotation OHP backing Proof Memo pages Eco Orig. set direction Invert Mirror Modify Basic User choice Function Program Leaving the backing sheet blank With this setting, the original will be copied onto the transparency but the backing sheet will be left blank. (The asterisk * in the illustration indicates the transparencies.) Rotation Eco OHP back Orig. set direction Test copy Invert Memo pages Mirror Modify copy Basic User choice Function Program 5-6

83 5 Touch the key or the Blank key, as appropriate. Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS Paper Size x8 /" OHP backing None Blank Insert a blank paper between piece of OHP film, or copy to a OHP back paper. Place the OHP film in the bypass. OHP back None Blank Insert blank paper between OHP films or copy to OHP back paper. Place OHP film on bypass. 6 Press the [Start] key. ing will start. 5-7

84 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 7. Inverting black and white [Invert mode] With this mode, you can make copies where the black and white areas of the image are inverted (or reversed). * If multiple inverted copies are being made, Please wait Now cleaning may be displayed. 5 Touch the key. Paper Size x8 /" Invert the scanned image with reversing black and white parts. Invert the originals to be copied. scanned image with black and white parts reversed. Touch the Function tab. The content of the Function tab will be displayed. 6 Press the [Start] key. ing will start. Touch the key. The content of the next portion of the Function tab will be displayed. Touch the Invert key. The Invert screen will be displayed. x8 /" Rotation OHP backing Proof Memo pages Eco Orig. set direction Invert Mirror Modify Basic User choice Function Program Rotation OHP back Test copy Memo pages Eco Orig. set direction Invert Mirror Modify copy Basic User choice Function Program 5-8

85 8. Making mirror image copies [Mirror image mode] With this mode, you can make mirror image copies. Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 5 Touch the key. Paper Size x8 /" Mirror Reverse scanned image left to right, mirror image. the originals to be copied. Mirror Touch the Function tab. The content of the Function tab will be displayed. Reversed scanned image left to right as a reflection in the mirror. Touch the key. The content of the next portion of the Function tab will be displayed. 6 Press the [Start] key. ing will start. Touch the Mirror key. The Mirror screen will be displayed. x8 /" Rotation OHP backing Proof Memo pages Eco Orig. set direction Invert Mirror Modify Basic User choice Function Program Rotation OHP back Test copy Memo pages Eco Orig. set direction Invert Mirror Modify copy Basic User choice Function Program 5-9

86 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 9. Making a test copy prior to large volume copying [Proof mode] With this mode, you can use the same settings to create a single set of test copies in order to verify the results prior to actually starting to make a large number of copies or copy sets. This way, if there is a problem with the copies, you can cancel print out in order to change the settings and eliminate a great majority of miss-copying. 5 Touch the key. Proof Paper 8 /x When "" is selected, copying stops after one set is ejected. This is useful for checking finishing. Test copy the originals to be copied. If "" is selected, copying stops after one set is ejected. Finishing result can then be checked. Touch the Function tab. The content of the Function tab will be displayed. 6 Press the [Start] key. ing will start. Touch the key. The content of the next portion of the Function tab will be displayed. If a message appears telling you to set the next original, go to the next step. Touch the Proof [ Test copy ] key. The Proof [ Test copy ] screen will be displayed. 7 Replace the first original with the next one and press the [Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start. Rotation OHP backing Proof Memo pages x8 /" 8 ce you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch the Scanning finished key. ing of the test copy set will start. Eco Orig. set direction Invert Mirror Modify Basic User choice Function Program Rotation OHP back Test copy Memo pages Eco Orig. set direction Invert Mirror Modify copy Basic User choice Function Program 5-0

87 9 ce the test copy set is complete, a screen will be displayed in order to verify whether or not you want to make the initially designated number of copy sets at the present settings, and the copier will enter a waiting-to-copy state. Check the test copies. Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS Check proof copy. To stop and retry, press "Cancel" key. To continue to print, press "Start" key. Orig. page Count/ Output Job0 x8 /" 00% x8 /" sided APS sided Rear Sort Inner tray Change Preset Cancel Check test copy. To stop and retry, press "Cancel" key. To continue to print, press "Start" key. Original Count / set Output A -sided Rtop/Rear 00% APS A -sided Sort Inner tray Cancel Change Preset JOB0 If there is no problem with the copies Press the [Start] key and copying of the initially designated number of copy sets will start. If you want to change the number of copies to be made, touch the Change Preset key and enter the actual number of copies you do want to make. If there is some problem with the copies Touch the Cancel key to cancel the copy job and start the procedure from the beginning. 5-

88 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 0. Making more of the same copies after a copy job is finished [Repeat copy mode] With this mode, if you think you might want to make another set of the same copies even after the initial copy job is finished, simply turn the repeat copy mode ON and you can make the necessary number of additional copies later. In order to maintain privacy, you can make it necessary to enter a security code in order to use the repeat copy mode so that, if the entered code doesn t match the registered security code, it will not be possible to use the repeat copy mode. Touch the Modify key. The Modify screen will be displayed. Rotation Eco OHP backing Orig. set direction Proof Invert Memo pages Mirror x8 /" Modify Basic User choice Function Program Rotation OHP back Test copy Memo pages Eco Orig. set direction Invert Mirror Modify copy Basic User choice Function Program S The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to use this mode. All data for repeat copying will be deleted when the main power switch is turned OFF. Repeat copying registration is not available for print out under document management or with the form overlay mode. You can prohibit repeat copying as well as make repeat copying the setting in the initial mode. (See Repeat copying ON/OFF on page 7-8.) 5 Touch the key. Modify Security # keys Paper Size x8 /" When select [], data can be saved. You can recall and re-print at anytime. You can set the password to secure saved document. () ing a copy job for repeat copying the originals to be copied. Touch the Function tab. The content of the Function tab will be displayed. Modify copy Security #-Keys When select [], job can be saved. You can recall and re-print at anytime. You can set a password to secure saved document. Touch the key. The content of the next portion of the Function tab will be displayed. If you want to register a security code, go to the next step. If you do NOT want to register a security code, go directly to step 7. 5-

89 6 Touch the # keys [ #-Keys ] key to highlight that key and then enter the security code that will enable repeat copying for these originals. Paper Size x8 /" Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS () ing out with the repeat copy mode ce you press the [Repeat ] key, the Modify copy list will be displayed so that you can verify the copy jobs that are registered for repeat copying. It is possible to reprint, check the contents of, and delete the copy jobs that are registered in this list. Modify Security Reprinting a registered copy job # keys When select [], data can be saved. You can recall and re-print at anytime. You can set the password to secure saved document. Press the [Repeat ] key. The Modify copy list will be displayed. Modify copy Security #-Keys When select [], job can be saved. You can recall and re-print at anytime. You can set a password to secure saved document. S The security code can be between and 8 digits long. If you forget the security code that you enter here, repeat copying will not be possible for these originals. Be sure to keep some sort of record of the security code. the copy job that you want to reprint and touch the Reprint key. Modify copy Job Input source Original Registration Type 9 7 0/0 :7 Norm. copy 0 5 0/0 :0 Norm. copy 7 Press the [Start] key. ing will start. Modify 0 Reprint 6 0/0 :5 0/0 :50 Delete Norm. copy Norm. copy Check details 0/0 :50 If a message appears telling you to set the next original, go to the next step. Modify copy 8 Replace the first original with the next one and press the [Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start. Job 9 0 Input source Original 7 0 Registration Type 5 0/0 :7 0/0 :0 0/0 :5 Norm. copy Norm. copy Norm. copy 6 0/0 :50 Norm. copy 9 ce you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch the Scanning finished key. ing will start. Modify copy Reprint Delete Check details 0/0 :50 If you designated a security code when you registered the copy job for repeat copying, the code input screen will be displayed. In this case, go to the next step. If you did NOT designate a security code when you registered the copy job for repeat copying, the screen to select the number of copies or copy sets to be made will be displayed. In this case, go directly to step. 5-

90 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS Use the keypad to enter the appropriate security code and the touch the Enter key. If the entered code matches the registered one, the screen to select the number of copies or copy sets to be made will be displayed. Checking the contents of registered copy jobs Press the [Repeat ] key. The Modify copy list will be displayed. Enter the re-print code. Stop (Enter by #key) Clear Enter Stop Enter the re-print code. (Enter #-key) the copy job that you want to check the content of and touch the Check detail key. Clear Enter Modify copy Job Input source Original Registration Type 9 7 0/0 :7 Norm. copy 0 5 0/0 :0 Norm. copy S To reenter a mistaken security code, touch the Clear key. If you touch the Stop key, the touch panel will return to the screen in step. Modify 0 Reprint 6 0/0 :5 0/0 :50 Delete Norm. copy Norm. copy Check details 0/0 :50 Modify copy Touch the + key or the - key to set the number of copies or copy sets to be made. Reprint Stop Job 9 0 Modify copy Input source Original 7 0 Reprint Registration Type 5 6 0/0 :7 0/0 :0 0/0 :5 0/0 :50 Delete Norm. copy Norm. copy Norm. copy Norm. copy Check details 0/0 :50 If you designated a security code when you registered the copy job for repeat copying, the code input screen will be displayed. In this case, go to the next step. Reprint ing Stop If you did NOT designate a security code when you registered the copy job for repeat copying, the Check details / Reprint screen will be displayed. In this case, go directly to step. ing 5 Touch the ing key. out will start. 5-

91 Use the keypad to enter the appropriate security code and the touch the Enter key. If the entered code matches the registered one, the Check details / Reprint screen will be displayed. Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS Deleting a registered copy jobs Press the [Repeat ] key. The Modify copy list will be displayed. Enter the re-print code. Stop (Enter by #key) Clear Enter Stop Enter the re-print code. (Enter #-key) the copy job that you want to delete and touch the Delete key. A verification screen will be displayed. Clear Enter Modify copy Check the contents of the selected job. You can also check the content of the first page of the copy job by touching the from st [ Head print ] key. Job 9 Input source Original Reprint Modify Registration Type 5 6 0/0 :7 0/0 :0 0/0 :5 0/0 :50 Norm. copy Norm. copy Norm. copy Norm. copy Delete Check details 0/0 :50 Check details / Reprint Item Details Orig. page 5 size x 8 /" Input source copy Registration date 0/0 :0 from st Modify copy Job 9 Input source Original 7 Registration Type 0/0 :7 Norm. copy 0 5 0/0 :0 Norm. copy Job /0 :5 0/0 :50 Norm. copy Norm. copy Modify copy Reprint Delete Check details 0/0 :50 Check details / Reprint Item Details Original 5 size A Input source Registration date 0/0 :0 Head print Job ce you have finished checking the content of the copy job, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. If you want to check the contents of another registered copy job, repeat steps through 5. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. 5-5

92 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS Touch the Yes key or the No key, as appropriate. Stop Job # : 7 Delete this job. Do you really want to delete? Yes No Stop Job # : 7 Delete this job. Do you really want to delete? Yes No If you selected Yes, the selected copy job will be canceled and the touch panel will return to the screen in step. If you selected No, the touch panel will return to the screen in step without canceling the selected job. 5 If you want to cancel another registered copy job, repeat steps through. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. 5-6

93 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS. ing a large volume of originals in one operation [Batch scanning mode] With this mode, you can scan multiple sets of originals and then have them all copied at the same time. Scan one set of originals of the same type and then register that as a single step in the copy job, and you can copy an extremely large volume of originals in one batch. Touch the key. Place originals then press Start key. Paper Size x8 /" Continuous scanning A B C B A C original. Press Start key. scanned images off. Platen as one job or scanned originals using document processor. Multiple scanning the originals to be copied. Originals scanned through the platen and Processor can be processed as one copy job. Touch the Function tab. The content of the Function tab will be displayed. 5 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start. Touch the Batch scanning [ Large # of originals ] key. The Continuous scanning [ Multiple scanning ] screen will be displayed. x8 /" paper sided/ Separation Combine Exposure mode Reduce /Enlarge ion Batch scanning Orig.image quality Margin/ Centering Page # Forms Overlay Sort/ Finished Border Erase Cover Mode Booklet Basic User choice Function Program 6 Replace the first originals with the next set and press the [Start] key. Scanning of those next originals (the next step in the copy job) will start. paper Exposure mode Image quality -sided/ Split Reduce/ Enlarge Margin/ Imag. shift size orig. selection Page numbering Merge copy Large # of originals Form overlay 7 ce you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch the Scanning finished key. ing will start. Sort/ Finished Erase Mode Cover Mode Booklet Basic User choice Function Program 5-7

94 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS. Saving on toner use [Eco print mode] With this mode, you can reduce the amount of toner that is used to make the copies. Use this mode with, for example making test copies, when you do not especially need to print out high quality copies. You can also make the eco print mode the setting in the initial mode. (See Eco print mode ON/OFF on page 7-66.) * Images will be printed out relatively lighter than normal. Touch the Eco key. The Eco screen will be displayed. Rotation Eco OHP backing Orig. set direction Proof Invert Memo pages Mirror x8 /" With the eco print mode turned OFF With the eco print mode turned ON Modify Basic User choice Function Program Rotation OHP back Test copy Memo pages Eco Orig. set direction Invert Mirror Modify copy the originals to be copied. Touch the Function tab. The content of the Function tab will be displayed. 5 Basic User choice Function Program Touch the key or the key, as appropriate. Paper Size x 8 /" Touch the key. The content of the next portion of the Function tab will be displayed. Eco Eco print is saving toner consumption, and it is economically. Eco It is possible to reduce toner consumption. Image is light. Eco Eco enables toner consumption reduction. Eco Toner consumption can be reduced. Image resolution reduced. 6 Press the [Start] key. ing will start. 5-8

95 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS. Original set direction During the procedures to use the -sided copy modes, the page separation/split copy modes, the margin mode, the centering/image shift mode, the memo mode, the border erase modes, the combine/ merge copy modes, the print page numbers mode, the booklet/ stitching mode, the auto selection/filing mode (optional), the staple mode (optional) and the punch mode (optional), it is necessary to specify the direction in which the originals were set. You can also use the following procedure to perform that setting as well. Touch the Rear [ Edge ] key or the Left top corner key, as appropriate. Orig. set direction Paper Size x 8 /" Check direction Check direction of original top side. You can also specify the direction of the original that will be used as the setting in the initial mode. (See Original set direction on page 7-6-.) "Check direction original" can be shown at right side of display. Follow the steps. If setting mode is wrong, incorrect copy will result. Rear Left top corner Orig. set direction Touch the Function tab. The content of the Function tab will be displayed. Touch the key. The content of the next portion of the Function tab will be displayed. "Check direction original" can be shown at right side of display. Follow the steps. If setting mode is wrong, incorrect copy will result. Check direction Check direction of original. Edge Left top corner Touch the Orig.set direction key. The Orig.set direction screen will be displayed. x8 /" Rotation OHP backing Proof Memo pages Eco Orig. set direction Invert Mirror Modify Basic User choice Function Program Rotation OHP back Test copy Memo pages Eco Orig. set direction Invert Mirror Modify copy Basic User choice Function Program 5-9

96 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS. Memorizing frequently used settings [Program function] to eight combinations of copy modes and other functions displayed on the operation panel can be registered as a single program using this function. You can also register a name for each registered program. 5 Use the displayed keyboard to enter the desired name and then touch the key. Name to display Stop () ing a program Catalog A Limit:6 letters including # AllDel = ` Del. prev the desired copy modes, etc., to be registered. q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ a s d f g h j k l ; ' z x c v b n m,. / Touch the Program tab. The content of the Program tab will be displayed. Capital Letter Num./Sym. Space Touch the key. Name to display Catalog A Limit: 6 letters inc. # key AllDel. Stop Del. prev Paper Size x 8 /" = ` q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ ` Recall Reg./delete a s d f g h j k l ; z x c v b n m,. / Capital Letter Symbol Symbol Space ' Delete Change name Basic User choice Function Program Refer to. Entering characters on page 7-0 for information on entering characters. Recall Reg./delete Basic User choice Function Program Delete Change name 6 Touch the Yes key or the No key, as appropriate. If you selected Yes, the selected program will be registered and the touch panel will return to the screen in step. ing is now possible using the settings that were registered under that program. Touch any key that is marked No registration and that corresponds to the program key ( 8) under which you want to register the settings. The screen to register a name for that program will be displayed. program. Stop Program # : Program name :Catalog A present setting program number. The set program is registered. Is it correct? Yes No No registration No registration No registration No registration No registration No registration No registration No registration program. Stop Program # : Program name : Catalog A present setting program number. The set program is registered. Is it correct? Yes No No registration No registration No registration No registration No registration No registration No registration No registration 5-50

97 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS () Using programmed settings to make copies Touch the Program tab. The content of the Program tab will be displayed. Touch the program key under which the settings that you want to use are registered. Touch the program key ( 8) for which you want to change the registered name. The screen to register a name for that program will be displayed. Registration name change the number for changing name. Catalog A File A Paper Size x 8 /" Catalog B File B Recall Catalog A File A Reg./delete Catalog C Catalog D No registration List A Catalog B File B Catalog C Catalog D List A Basic User choice Function Program Delete Change name Registration name change the number for changing name. Catalog A File A Catalog B File B Catalog C No registration Recall Catalog A File A Reg./delete Catalog D List A Catalog B Catalog C File B Delete Catalog D List A Basic User choice Function Program Change name ce you have deleted the old name and entered the new one, press the key. the originals to be copied and press the [Start] key. ing will start using the settings that were registered under that program. Name to display Catalog A Limit:6 letters including # AllDel. Stop Del. prev = ` q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ () Changing a registered program name a s d f g h j k l ; z x c v b n m,. / Capital Letter Num./Sym. Space ' Touch the Program tab. The content of the Program tab will be displayed. Touch the Change name key. Name to display Stop Catalog A Limit: 6 letters inc. # key AllDel = ` Del. prev Paper Size x 8 /" q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ a s d f g h j k l ; ' ` Recall Reg./delete z x c v b n m,. / Catalog A File A Capital Letter Symbol Symbol Space Catalog B Catalog C File B Delete Catalog D List A Basic User choice Function Program Change name Refer to. Entering characters on page 7-0 for information on entering characters. Recall Reg./delete Catalog A File A Catalog B File B Catalog C Catalog D Basic User choice List A Function Program Delete Change name 5 ce The set program is registered. Is it correct? is displayed, check the entered name and, if it is correct, touch the Yes key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. 5-5

98 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS () Deleting a registered program Touch the Program tab. The content of the Program tab will be displayed. Touch the Yes key or the No key, as appropriate. Delete program. Stop Touch the Delete key. Program # Program name Catalog A This program will be deleted. Are you sure? Yes No Paper Size x 8 /" Recall Catalog A File A Reg./delete Catalog B Catalog C File B Delete Delete program. Stop Catalog D List A Change name Program # Basic User choice Function Program Program name Catalog A This program will be deleted. Are you sure? YES NO Recall Catalog A Catalog B Catalog C Catalog D File A File B List A Reg./delete Delete Change name If you selected Yes, the selected program will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step. If you selected No, the touch panel will return to the screen in step without deleting the selected program. Basic User choice Function Program Touch the program key ( 8) that corresponds to the program that you want to delete. lnch specifications Delete registration the number of program to delete. Catalog A Catalog B Catalog C Catalog D File A File B No registration List A Delete registration the number of program to delete. Catalog A Catalog B Catalog C Catalog D File A File B No registration List A 5-5

99 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 5. Registration keys You can register up to functions and/or modes, from among those displayed in the Function tab, under the registration keys. The functions and modes in the Basic tab and the User choice tab can be registered under registration keys as well. () ing a function or mode under a function key Perform the following procedure when you want to register a function or mode under a registration key. To register a function or mode under a registration key, refer to the following sample procedure (which shows how to register the in combine/merge copy mode under a registration key). Touch the in key and then the key. Combine None Layout Border line None Solid Dotted Borders x8 /" 50% Check direction Check direction of original top side. Rear Left top corner Merge copy IMPORTANT! In order to register functions and/or modes under registration keys, you must first turn the setting ON under Registration keys ON/OFF on page 7-8. None -in- -in- Layout Border line None Solid Dotted Cropmark Check direction Check direction of original. Edge Left top corner Touch the Function tab. The content of the Function tab will be displayed. In the screen, touch the key once again. The screen to register functions and/or modes under registration keys will be displayed. Touch the Combine [ Merge copy ] key. The Combine [ Merge copy ] screen will be displayed. item. lnch specifications x8 /" paper sided/ Separation Combine Delete Exposure mode Reduce /Enlarge ion Batch scanning Orig.image quality Sort/ Finished Margin/ Centering Border Erase Page # Cover Mode Forms Overlay Booklet Basic User choice Function Program item. paper -sided/ Split size orig. Merge copy Delete Exposure mode Reduce/ Enlarge selection Large # of originals Image quality Margin/ Imag. shift Page numbering Form overlay Sort/ Finished Erase Mode Cover Mode Booklet Basic User choice Function Program 5-5

100 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 5 Touch the registration key under which you want to register the function. this selecting mode. OK? will be displayed. If, in the screen to register functions and/or modes under registration keys, you select a previously registered key, the following screen will be displayed. present setting the number of program to registered. No registrat. No registrat. No registrat. this function. This number is already registered. No. Stop this selecting mode. OK? Yes No present setting the number of program to registered. No registrat. No registrat. No registrat. this function. This number is already registered No. this selecting mode. OK? Stop YES NO 6 Touch the Yes key. The Combine [ Merge copy ] screen will be displayed again. this function. Stop If you selected Yes, the selected function will be registered under the registration key. If you selected No, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 5 without registering the selected function. No. this selecting mode. OK? Yes No 7 Touch the key. The Combine [ Merge copy ] key will now appear on the right side of the touch panel as a registration key. this function. Stop 8 /x" No. this selecting mode. OK? paper Exposure mode Orig.image quality sided/ Separation Reduce /Enlarge Margin/ Centering ion Page # Combine Batch scanning Forms Overlay Combine YES NO Sort/ Finished Border Erase Cover Mode Booklet Basic User choice Function Program paper Exposure mode -sided/ Split Reduce/ Enlarge size original selection Merge copy Large # of originals Merge copy Image quality orig. Margin/ Imag. shift Page numbering Form overlay Sort/ Finished Erase Mode Cover Mode Booklet Basic User choice Function Program The functions and modes in the Basic tab and the User choice tab can be registered under registration keys as well. A key will be displayed in the screen for those function and modes which can be registered under the registration keys. 5-5

101 () Deleting a registration key Perform the following procedure when you want to delete a registration key. Touch the registration (to the right of the Basic tab) that you want to delete. (Example: Combine [ Merge copy ]) lnch specifications Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS In the screen, touch the Delete key once again. The screen to delete registration keys will be displayed. item. Paper Size x8 /" Delete x8 /" 8 /x" Color x8 /" x8 /" Recycled APS Exposure Exposure mode AMS Reduce /Enlarge Sort: Sort: Sort/ Finished Combine Orig.image quality Reduce /Enlarge item. Basic User choice Function Program Paper Size Delete Merge copy Colour Recycled APS Exposure Exposure mode AMS Reduce/ Enlarge Basic User choice Function Program Sort: Sort: Sort/ Finished Image quality Reduce/ Enlarge Touch the registration key ( ) that corresponds to the program that you want to delete. Are you sure you want to delete? will be displayed. In the resulting screen for that function or mode (example: the Combine [ Merge copy ] screen), touch the key. The screen will be displayed. lnch specifications x8 /" 50% Delete registration the number of program to delete. Combine Orig. Image quality Reduce /Enlarge Combine Layout Border line None Check direction Check direction of original top side. None Solid Dotted Borders Rear Left top corner Delete registration the number of program to delete. Merge copy Image quality Reduce/ Enlarge Merge copy Layout Border line None Check direction Check direction of original. None Solid -in- Dotted -in- Cropmark Edge Left top corner 5-55

102 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 5 Touch the Yes key. The Combine [ Merge copy ] screen will be displayed again. Delete registration. Stop No. Are you sure you want to delete? Yes No Delete registration. Stop No. Are you sure you want to delete? YES NO 6 Touch the key. The Combine [ Merge copy ] key will be deleted from on the right side of the touch panel. Paper Size x8 /" x8 /" 8 /x" Color x8 /" x8 /" Recycled APS Exposure Exposure mode AMS Reduce /Enlarge Sort: Sort: Sort/ Finished Orig.image quality Reduce /Enlarge Basic User choice Function Program Paper Size Colour APS Exposure AMS Sort: Sort: Image quality Reduce/ Enlarge Recycled Exposure mode Reduce/ Enlarge Sort/ Finished Basic User choice Function Program 5-56

103 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 6. Easily add covers and insert sheets between various sets of originals in one operation [Job build mode] The job build function enables you to scan different sets of originals into memory in separate steps and then copy them all at one time. Each set of scanned originals is then seen as one step in the copy process and you can select different copy modes for each step (enlarge/reduce, border erase, original type [-sided originals, -sided originals or open-faced book originals]). You can choose to have a blank sheet of paper fed in between each set of originals, as well as have front and rear covers included for the full set, AND do this all during -sided copying! This procedure will assume that the color paper to be used as the front cover and the middle insert (originals A and C ), as well as for the back cover, will be set on the multi-bypass, and that there is plain copy paper loaded in drawer[cassette] No.. Step : Accessing the Job build screen Press the [Job build] key. The Job build screen will be displayed. A- B- C- A- A- C- B- B- () Using the job build mode The following procedure shows one way of using the job build mode and explains how to perform that operation under the situation indicated in the examples below. [Example] <Finished copies> (The asterisk * in the illustration indicates the blank sheets.) Making the settings that apply to all steps First, the settings for the -sided copy modes and the repeat copy mode must be made. S The repeat copy mode is used to enable you to make an additional number of copy sets later. It is also possible to select other settings and functions, as desired, besides those given in the example procedure. (See () ing the settings and functions on page 5-6.) - - A- - - Touch the sided/ sided key. The sided/ sided screen will be displayed. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Job Build - Step <Originals> x8 / paper set Finished sided sided copy Original type AMS Reduce /Enlarge sided/ sided Edge Orig. set direction sided copy-left Finished page #:0 Insert page Basic Quality Edit A B C D Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Job Build-Step paper Group Finished -sided Original type AMS Reduce/ Enlarge -sided -sided/ -sided Edge Orig. set direction -sided -Left Finished page #: 0 Insert blank page Basic Quality Edit 5-57

104 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS Touch the sided copy key and then touch the Open from left [ Left binding ] key. Finally, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. 5 Touch the key. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. sided/ sided copy Modify Finished Check direction Check direction of original top side. sided copy sided copy Open from left Open from right Open from top Rear Left top corner When select [], data can be saved. You can recall and re-print at anytime. You can set the password to secure saved document. Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. -sided / -sided Modify copy Finished Check direction Check direction of original. -sided -sided Left binding Right binding Top binding Edge Left top corner When select [], job can be saved. When You the can mode recall is set and [], re-print it canat anytime. save a You job can data set and a password reprint it anytime. to secure saved And you document. can set that other user are not able to reprint. Touch the Edit key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the Modify key. The Modify screen will be displayed. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Job Build - Step Border Erase None Margin/ Centering orig.size None Page # Modify Basic Quality Edit Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. sided copy-left Finished page # : 0 Insert page from Rear page Making the settings for the first original ( A in the illustration on page 5-57.) The multi-bypass is to be selected for color paper feed under the paper screen. 6 Touch the paper key. The paper screen will be displayed. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Job Build - Step x8 / paper -sided Original type sided copy sided/ sided set AMS Edge Finished Reduce Orig. set /Enlarge direction Basic Quality Edit sided copy-left Finished page #:0 Insert page from Rear page Job Build - Step Erase Mode None Margin/ Imag.shift size orig. None Page numbering None Modify copy -sided -Left Finished page #: 0 Insert blank page from rear page Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Job Build-Step Basic Quality Edit paper Group Finished -sided Original type AMS Reduce/ Enlarge -sided -sided/ -sided Edge Orig. set direction -sided -Left Finished page #: 0 Insert blank page from rear page Basic Quality Edit 5-58

105 7 Touch the key. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 6. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. paper x8 / x8 / x8 / Color 8 /x Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS Step : Making the settings for the second originals ( B in the illustration on page 5-57.) Drawer[Cassette] No. is to be selected for plain paper feed under the paper screen. 0 Touch the paper key. The paper screen will be displayed. Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Job Build - Step x8 / paper set sided sided copy Original type AMS Reduce /Enlarge sided/ sided Edge Orig. set direction Finished Basic Quality Edit sided copy-left Finished page #: Next copy page: Front Cancel Insert page from Rear page Scanning finished paper Colour Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Job Build - Step Cancel 8 the first original ( A ) to be copied. Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start. paper Group -sided Original type AMS Reduce/ Enlarge -sided -sided/ -sided Edge Orig. set direction Finished Basic Quality Edit -sided -Left Finished page #: Next copy page: Front Insert blank page from rear page Scanning finished Step : Leaving the back side of the first original ( A ) blank 9 Touch the from Front page key. Leaving the back side of the original blank will allow the next copy to start on the front side of the next page. Touch the key that corresponds to drawer[cassette] No.. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 0. Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Job Build - Step x8 / paper set sided sided copy Original type AMS Reduce /Enlarge sided/ sided Edge Orig. set direction Finished Basic Quality Edit sided copy-left Finished page #: Next copy page: Rear Cancel Insert page from Front page Scanning finished paper x8 / x8 / x8 / Color 8 /x Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. paper Job Build- Step Cancel paper Group -sided Original type AMS Reduce/ Enlarge -sided -sided/ -sided Edge Orig. set direction Finished Basic Quality Edit -sided -Left Finished page #: Next copy page: Rear Insert blank page from front page Scanning finished Colour the second originals ( B ) to be copied. Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start. 5-59

106 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS Step : Making the settings for the third original ( C in the illustration on page 5-57.) The multi-bypass is to be selected for color paper feed under the paper screen. Touch the paper key. The paper screen will be displayed. Step 5: Leaving the back side of the third original ( C ) blank 6 Touch the from Front page key. Leaving the back side of the original blank will allow the next copy to start on the front side of the next page. Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Job Build - Step x8 / paper set sided sided copy Original type AMS Reduce /Enlarge sided/ sided Edge Orig. set direction Finished Basic Quality Edit sided copy-left Finished page #: Next copy page: Front Cancel Insert page from Rear page Scanning finished Job Build - Step5 x8 / paper set sided sided copy Original type AMS Reduce /Enlarge sided/ sided Edge Orig. set direction Finished Basic Quality Edit sided copy-left Finished page #:5 Next copy page: Rear Cancel Insert page from Front page Scanning finished Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Job Build- Step -sided -sided paper Original type -sided/ -sided Group AMS Edge Finished Reduce/ Orig. set Enlarge direction Basic Quality Edit -sided -Left Finished page #: Next copy page: Front Cancel Insert blank page from rear page Scanning finished Job Build - Step5 paper Group -sided Original type AMS Reduce/ Enlarge -sided -sided/ -sided Edge Orig. set direction Finished Basic Quality Edit -sided -Left Finished page #: 5 Next copy page: Rear Cancel Insert blank page from front page Scanning finished Touch the key. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Step 6: Making the settings for the fourth originals ( D in the illustration on page 5-57.) Drawer[Cassette] No. is to be selected for plain paper feed under the paper screen. 7 Touch the paper key. The paper screen will be displayed. paper x8 / x8 / x8 / Color 8 /x Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Job Build - Step6 x8 / paper set sided sided copy Original type AMS Reduce /Enlarge sided/ sided Edge Orig. set direction Finished Basic Quality Edit sided copy-left Finished page #:6 Next copy page: Front Cancel Insert page from Rear page Scanning finished Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. paper Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Job Build - Step6 Cancel 5 Colour the third original ( C ) to be copied. Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the original will start. paper Group -sided Original type AMS Reduce/ Enlarge -sided -sided/ -sided Edge Orig. set direction Finished Basic Quality Edit -sided -Left Finished page #: 6 Next copy page: Front Insert blank page from rear page Scanning finished 5-60

107 8 Touch the key that corresponds to drawer[cassette] No.. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 7. Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS Touch the key. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 0. Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. paper paper x8 / x8 / x8 / Color 8 /x x8 / x8 / x8 / Color 8 /x Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. paper paper Colour Colour 9 the fourth originals ( D ) to be copied. Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start. Touch the Insert page [ Insert blank page ] key. Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Job Build - Step7 Cancel Step 7: Making the settings for a blank rear cover The multi-bypass is to be selected for color paper feed under the paper screen. 0 Touch the paper key. The paper screen will be displayed. Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. x8 / paper set sided sided copy Original type AMS Reduce /Enlarge sided/ sided Edge Orig. set direction Finished Basic Quality Edit Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Job Build - Step7 sided copy-left Finished page #:8 Next copy page: Front Insert page from Rear page Scanning finished Cancel Job Build - Step7 x8 / paper set sided sided copy Original type AMS Reduce /Enlarge sided/ sided Edge Orig. set direction Finished Basic Quality Edit sided copy-left Finished page #:8 Next copy page: Front Cancel Insert page from Rear page Scanning finished paper Group -sided Original type AMS Reduce/ Enlarge -sided -sided/ -sided Edge Orig. set direction Finished Basic Quality Edit -sided -Left Finished page #: 8 Next copy page: Front Insert blank page from rear page Scanning finished The job build set-up procedure is complete. Touch the Scanning finished key. ing will start. Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Job Build - Step7 paper Group -sided Original type AMS Reduce/ Enlarge -sided -sided/ -sided Edge Orig. set direction Finished Basic Quality Edit -sided -Left Finished page #: 8 Next copy page: Front Cancel Insert blank page from rear page Scanning finished Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Job Build - Step8 x8 / paper set sided sided copy Original type AMS Reduce /Enlarge sided/ sided Edge Orig. set direction Finished Basic Quality Edit sided copy-left Finished page #:0 Next copy page: Front Cancel Insert page from Rear page Scanning finished Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press start key. Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy. Job Build - Step8 Cancel paper Group -sided Original type AMS Reduce/ Enlarge -sided -sided/ -sided Edge Orig. set direction Finished Basic Quality Edit -sided -Left Finished page #: 0 Next copy page: Front Insert blank page from rear page Scanning finished 5-6

108 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS If there are no problems with the copy set you made, then you can use the repeat copy mode to make any additional number of copy sets as desired (see () ing out with the repeat copy mode on page 5-). () ing the settings and functions Specifying the type of originals This procedure specifies the type of originals being copied between -sided, -sided and open-faced. With the content of the Basic tab displayed, touch the Original type key. The Original type screen will be displayed. ing the paper This procedure selects the size of the copy paper. With the content of the Basic tab displayed, touch the paper key. The paper screen will be displayed. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Job Build - Step x8 / paper sided sided copy Original type sided/ sided set AMS Edge Reduce Orig. set Finished /Enlarge direction Basic Quality Edit sided copy-left Finished page #:0 Insert page Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Job Build - Step x8 / paper sided sided copy Original type sided/ sided set AMS Edge Reduce Orig. set Finished /Enlarge direction Basic Quality Edit sided copy-left Finished page #:0 Insert page Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Job Build-Step paper -sided Original type -sided -sided/ -sided Group AMS Edge Reduce/ Orig. set Finished Enlarge direction Basic Quality Edit -sided -Left Finished page #: 0 Insert blank page Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Job Build-Step paper Group Finished -sided Original type AMS Reduce/ Enlarge -sided -sided/ -sided Edge Orig. set direction -sided -Left Finished page #: 0 Insert blank page between sided, sided and Book, in accordance with the originals being copied. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Basic Quality Edit Original type Check direction Check direction of original top side. Touch the key that corresponds to the drawer[cassette] which contains the desired size of copy paper, and then touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. sided sided Book Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Original type Rear Left top corner paper Check direction Check direction of original. x8 / x8 / x8 / Color 8 /x sided -sided Book Edge Left top corner S Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. paper Colour If you selected sided, verify the direction in which the originals were set. If you selected sided, specify the binding direction of the originals and then verify the direction in which the originals were set. If you selected Book, specify the binding direction of the originals. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. 5-6

109 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS ing between -sided or -sided copies This procedure selects the type of finished copies to be made between -sided and -sided. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. With the content of the Basic tab displayed, touch the sided/ sided key. The sided/ sided screen will be displayed. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Job Build - Step x8 / paper sided sided copy Original type sided/ sided set AMS Edge Reduce Orig. set Finished /Enlarge direction Basic Quality Edit Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. sided copy-left Finished page #:0 Insert page ing how to finished up the copy sets If the optional Finisher is installed on your copier, this procedure lets you select whether to staple or hole punch the finished copy sets. With the content of the Basic tab displayed, touch the Finished key. The Finished screen will be displayed. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Job Build - Step x8 / paper sided sided copy Original type sided/ sided set AMS Edge Reduce Orig. set Finished /Enlarge direction Basic Quality Edit sided copy-left Finished page #:0 Insert page Job Build-Step paper Group Finished -sided Original type AMS Reduce/ Enlarge -sided -sided/ -sided Edge Orig. set direction -sided -Left Finished page #: 0 Insert blank page Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Job Build-Step Basic Quality Edit paper Group Finished -sided Original type AMS Reduce/ Enlarge -sided -sided/ -sided Edge Orig. set direction -sided -Left Finished page #: 0 Insert blank page The setting in regard to making either -sided or -sided copies can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps in the copy job. Basic Quality Edit Touch the sided key or the sided key, as appropriate, and then select the binding direction you want for the finished copies. Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel and verify the direction in which the originals were set. The setting in regard to how the copy sets will be finished can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps in the copy job. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. sided/ sided copy sided copy sided copy Finished Open from left Open from right Open from top Check direction Check direction of original top side. Rear Left top corner Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. -sided / -sided Finished Check direction Check direction of original. -sided -sided Left binding Right binding Top binding Edge Left top corner IMPORTANT! If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly. 5-6

110 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS how you want the copy sets to be finished by touching the Staple mode key, the Saddle Stitch [ Center Staple ] key or the Punch mode key, as appropriate. Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel and verify the direction in which the originals were set. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Finished set Staple No cover Staple mode None Saddle Stitch Punch No cover Punch mode Check direction Check direction of original top side. Rear Left top corner the desired magnification ratio. If you want to have the copy magnification ratio selected automatically, touch the AMS key. If you want to manually set the magnification ratio, touch the # keys [ #-Keys ] key and then enter the desired ratio with the keypad, or touch the + key or the - key to change the displayed magnification ratio to the desired setting in % increments. You can also select the magnification ratio by touching the preset zoom ratio keys at the right that corresponds to the desired ratio. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Reduce/Enlarge (5 00) Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Finished Group Group Staple Punch Check direction Check direction of original. Standard Zoom XY Zoom # keys 00 % AMS 00 % 00 % 00 % 5 /x8 /"Rx7" 5 % 5 /x8 /"R8 /x" 9 % 8 /x" Rx7" % 8 /x" R8 /x7" 78 % 8 /x" R8 /x" 77 % x7" R8 /x" 6 % x7" R8 /x" 50 % x7" R5 /x8 /" 5 % None set set Staple Mode None Center Staple Punch Mode Edge Left top corner Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Reduce/Enlarge (5~00) IMPORTANT! If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly. Standard Zoom XY Zoom #-Keys 00 % AMS 00% 00% 00% A 5 A % A A A 5 A 7% Folio A 06% x5" A 90% Folio A 75% x5" A 70% A A A A5 50% 5% Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. 5 Making copies at an enlarged or reduced magnification ratio This procedure selects the magnification ratio of the finished copies. With the content of the Basic tab displayed, touch the Reduce/Enlarge key. The Reduce/Enlarge screen will be displayed. (Asia Pacific) Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Reduce/Enlarge Standard Zoom XY Zoom (5~00) #-Keys 00 % AMS 00% 00% 00% % % 5% 86% A 5 A A A B 5 B A B A 5 B 5 B A B 5 A A B A B 5 8% 70% 50% 5% Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. B A B 5 A 5 A A B B 5 Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Job Build - Step x8 / paper sided sided copy Original type sided/ sided set AMS Edge Reduce Orig. set Finished /Enlarge direction Basic Quality Edit sided copy-left Finished page #:0 Insert page Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Job Build-Step paper Group Finished -sided Original type AMS Reduce/ Enlarge -sided -sided/ -sided Edge Orig. set direction -sided -Left Finished page #: 0 Insert blank page Basic Quality Edit 5-6

111 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 6 Specifying the direction that the originals were set This procedure specifies the direction of the set originals. 7 ting the scanning density This procedure sets the copy exposure for the finished copies. With the content of the Basic tab displayed, touch the Orig.set direction key. The Orig.set direction screen will be displayed. Touch the Quality key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the Exposure mode key. The Exposure mode screen will be displayed. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Job Build - Step Job Build - Step x8 / paper set Finished sided sided copy Original type AMS Reduce /Enlarge sided/ sided Edge Orig. set direction sided copy-left Finished page #:0 Insert page Density Exposure mode Text+Photo Orig. image quality Eco sided copy-left Finished page # : 0 Insert page Basic Quality Edit Basic Quality Edit Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Job Build-Step Job Build - Step paper Group Finished -sided Original type AMS Reduce/ Enlarge -sided -sided/ -sided Edge Orig. set direction -sided -Left Finished page #: 0 Insert blank page Manual Exposure mode Text + Photo Image quality Eco -sided -Left Finished page #: 0 Insert blank page Basic Quality Edit Basic Quality Edit Touch the Rear [ Edge ] key or the Left top corner key, as appropriate, according to the direction of the originals. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Org. set direction If you want to have the copy exposure selected automatically, touch the key. If you want to manually set the exposure, touch the Manual key and then touch the Lighter key or the Darker key to move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the exposure as desired. "Check direction original" can be shown at right side of display. Follow the steps. If setting mode is wrong, incorrect copy will result. Check direction Check direction of original top side. Rear Left top corner Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Exposure mode Manual Lighter Darker Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Orig. set direction Check direction Check direction of original. Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. "Check direction original" can be shown at right side of display. Follow the steps. If setting mode is wrong, incorrect copy will result. Edge Left top corner Exposure mode Manual Lighter Darker IMPORTANT! If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. 5-65

112 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 8 ting the image quality This procedure sets the image quality according to the type of originals being copied. Touch the Quality key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the Orig. image quality key. The Orig. image quality screen will be displayed. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. 9 Turning the eco print mode ON This procedure allows you to turn the eco print mode ON in order to save on toner use. Touch the Quality key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the Eco key. The Eco screen will be displayed. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Job Build - Step Job Build - Step Density Exposure mode Text+Photo Orig. image quality Eco sided copy-left Finished page # : 0 Insert page Density Exposure mode Text+Photo Orig. image quality Eco sided copy-left Finished page # : 0 Insert page Basic Quality Edit Basic Quality Edit Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Job Build - Step Job Build - Step Manual Exposure mode Text + Photo Image quality Eco -sided -Left Finished page #: 0 Insert blank page Manual Exposure mode Text + Photo Image quality Eco -sided -Left Finished page #: 0 Insert blank page Basic Quality Edit Basic Quality Edit the image quality mode by touching the Manual key and then touching the Text+Photo key, the Photo key or the Text key, as appropriate. The setting in regard to whether or not to use the eco print mode can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps in the copy job. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Orig.image quality Touch the key to turn the eco print mode ON. Text+Photo Photo Text Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Text+Photo : this mode to copy orig. with mixed text and photo Photo : Add a dimensional effect of photo Text : a pencil or fine line. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Eco Eco is saving toner consumption, and it is economically. Eco It is possible to reduce toner consumption. Image is a little light. Image quality orig. Text+Photo Photo Text Text+Photo: this mode to copy original mixed (text & photo). Photo: Add a dimensional effect of photo. Text : pencil & fine line clearly. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Eco Eco enables toner consumption reduction. Eco Toner consumption can be reduced. Image resolution reduced. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. 5-66

113 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 0 ing the sheet erase mode This procedure selects the sheet erase mode in order to erase the shadows, lines, etc., that can occur around the edges of copies.! Manually selecting the size of the originals This procedure allow you to select the size of the originals manually using the touch panel. Touch the Edit key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the Border Erase [ Erase Mode ] key. The Border Erase [ Erase Mode ] screen will be displayed. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Job Build - Step Touch the Edit key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the [ size orig. ] key. The original size [ size original ] screen will be displayed. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Border Erase None Margin/ Centering orig.size None Page # Modify Basic Quality Edit sided copy-left Finished page # : 0 Insert page Job Build - Step Border Erase None Margin/ Centering orig.size None Page # Modify sided copy-left Finished page # : 0 Insert page Basic Quality Edit Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Job Build - Step Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Erase Mode None Margin/ Imag.shift size orig. None Page numbering None Modify copy Basic Quality Edit -sided -Left Finished page #: 0 Insert blank page Job Build - Step Erase Mode None Margin/ Imag.shift size orig. None Page numbering None Modify copy -sided -Left Finished page #: 0 Insert blank page Basic Quality Edit Touch the Sheet Erase [ Border erase ] key or Individual BordrErase [ Individual Erase Mode ] key and then set the desired border width. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Border Erase None Sheet Erase Individual BordrErase Erase the border shadow of original. If you want the size of the originals to be detected automatically, touch the key. If you want to select a standard original size, touch the key that corresponds to the desired size. If you want to select another standard original size, touch the Other stand. Size [ Others stand. Size ] key and select the desired size. If you want to select the dimensions of the originals manually, touch the Input size key and then set the corresponding dimensions. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. original size User regist. Erase Mode size x 7" 8 / x " 5 / x 8 /" x 5" A 0 x 0" 9 x 9" Input size 8 / x " 8 / x 5 /" A 8 x 8" None Border erase Individual Erase Mode Erase edge of original copy. Other stand. Size x 8 /" x " Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. size original Use regist. 5x00mm size 5x00mm Input size Others stand. Size Folio 5x00mm 5x00mm Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. 5-67

114 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT ing the repeat copy mode This procedure allow you to select the repeat copy mode so that you can make any necessary number of additional copies later. # ing the margin mode or the centering/image shift mode This procedure selects the margin mode or the centering/image shift mode in order to create a margin space or center the copy image. Touch the Edit key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the Modify key. The Modify screen will be displayed. Touch the Edit key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the Margin/Centering [ Margin/Imag. shift ] key. The Margin/ Centering [ Margin/Imag. shift ] screen will be displayed. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Job Build - Step Job Build - Step Border Erase None Margin/ Centering orig.size None Page # Modify sided copy-left Finished page # : 0 Insert page Border Erase None Margin/ Centering orig.size None Page # Modify sided copy-left Finished page # : 0 Insert page Basic Quality Edit Basic Quality Edit Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Job Build - Step Job Build - Step Erase Mode None Margin/ Imag.shift size orig. None Page numbering None Modify copy -sided -Left Finished page #: 0 Insert blank page Erase Mode None Margin/ Imag.shift size orig. None Page numbering None Modify copy -sided -Left Finished page #: 0 Insert blank page Basic Quality Edit Basic Quality Edit S To make additional copies with the repeat copy mode, refer to () ing out with the repeat copy mode on page 5-. The setting in regard to whether or not to use the repeat copy mode can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps in the copy job. The setting in regard to the margin mode or the centering/image shift mode can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps in the copy job. Touch the key to select the repeat copy mode. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Touch the Margin key or the Centering [ Imag.shift ] key, as appropriate. For more detailed information on these two settings, refer to the explanation for the margin mode on page 5-6 or the centering/image shift mode on page 5-8, as appropriate. Modify Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. When select [], data can be saved. You can recall and re-print at anytime. You can set the password to secure saved document. Margin/Centering None Margin Reposition image to left/right or top/bottom, and also center image on paper. Centering Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Modify copy Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Margin/Image shift When select [], job can be saved. When You the can mode recall is set and [], re-print it canat anytime. save a You job can data set and a password reprint it anytime. to secure saved And you document. can set that other user are not able to reprint. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. None Margin Image shift Reposition image to left/right or top/bottom and center image on paper. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. 5-68

115 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS $ ing the print page numbers mode This procedure selects the print page numbers mode in order to have page numbers printed on the corresponding copies. Touch the Edit key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the Page # [ Page numbering ] key. The Page # [ Page numbering ] screen will be displayed. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Job Build - Step Border Erase None Margin/ Centering orig.size None Page # Modify sided copy-left Finished page # : 0 Insert page Basic Quality Edit Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Job Build - Step Erase Mode None Margin/ Imag.shift size orig. None Page numbering None Modify copy -sided -Left Finished page #: 0 Insert blank page Basic Quality Edit The setting in regard to the print page numbers mode can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps in the copy job. For more detailed information on this setting, refer to the explanation for the print page numbers mode on page 5-6. Ready to Job build. Place originals then press Start key. Page # P. /n Page # can be added on bottom of copy. Ready to Job build. original. Press Start key. Page numbering None -- None -- P. /n Page # can be added on bottom of copy. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. 5-69

116 Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 5-70

117 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS. management functions The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to use this function. () What are the document management functions? management functions refer to those functions that enable you to scan and save documents onto the copier s hard disk, and then use that data for copying purposes. Each function has it s own separate box (the area where document data is saved) on the hard disk and all data for that particular function is saved into that specific box. () Form registration ing a form Perform the following procedure when you want to register an images as a form for use in the form overlay mode. the document that you want to register as a form. Press the [ ] key. The screen will be displayed. The following document management functions are available with this copier: Form registration (pages 6- through 6-) You can store in a box on the copier s hard disk, and you can then manage the use of, those images that will be used as the form in the form overlay mode. Shared data box (pages 6- through 6-8) If you register data that will be shared by all users in the shared data box, it will be possible for each user to print out that data at their own convenience. This is useful, for example, for registering business forms and the like that are frequently used my many people. The data that you register here will be stored permanently until the procedure to delete it is performed. Touch the Form reg. [ Form registr. ] key. The Form registration screen will be displayed. function. 5/0/'0 9:0 Synergy print boxes (pages 6-9 through 6-9) If you store multiple sets of documents in a synergy print box, you can print out up to 0 of these sets at one time. Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box reg. Box Editing printing reg. Box Editing printing Form reg. Box Editing function. 5/0/'0 9:0 Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box registr. printing registr. printing Form registr. Box Editing Box Editing Box Editing 6-

118 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Touch the Change name key and then enter a name for the form data. If you do not want to register a name for the form data, go directly to the next step. Ready to register form(s). Place originals then press Start key. Form registration Form box s Form006 Change name size regi. size 00% Reduce /Enlarge Original x8 /" 8 /x" 5/0/'0 9:0 Cancel Edge Orig. set direction Basic Quality Edit Checking registered forms and changing form names Perform the following procedure when you want to verify the name of a registered form, the size of the original document or the date and time it was stored in memory, or when you want to print out the document in order to check it. You can also use this procedure to change the registered form name. Press the [ ] key. The screen will be displayed. Ready to register form(s). original. Press Start key. Form registration Original A A 5/0/'0 9:0 Job cancel Form box s FORM006 Change name size orig. size regi. size 00% Reduce/ Enlarge Edge Orig. set direction Basic Quality Edit Touch the Box Editing key under Form box. The Box editing screen will be displayed. Refer to. Entering characters on page 7-0 for information on entering characters. function. 5/0/'0 9:0 Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box 5 Touch the [ size orig. ], regi. size, Reduce/Enlarge and/or Orig. set direction keys if you want to perform the corresponding settings for the originals being used. If you want to access the Scanning density key and/or the Orig. image quality [ Image quality ] key to make those settings, touch the Quality key. If you want to set access the Border Erase [ Erase Mode ] key to make those settings, touch the Edit key. reg. Box Editing printing function. reg. Box Editing printing Form reg. Box Editing Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box 5/0/'0 9:0 6 7 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the document will start. ce the document has been completely scanned, the touch panel will return to the screen in step. If you want to register another form, repeat steps through 6. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. registr. Box Editing printing registr. Box Editing printing Form registr. Box Editing the form that you want to check and then touch the Conf/Crrt. details [ Check/Rev. details ] key. The Check/ Correct details [ Check/revise details ] screen will be displayed. Box editing Form Form 005 Form 00 Form 00 x8 /" 0/0/9 x8 /" 0/0/9 8 /x" 0/0/9 Order of indication Conf/Crrt. details Form 00 Form 00 x8 /" 0/0/9 x8 /" 0/0/9 00/005 Delete - Form box Box editing Form Form 007 Form 006 Form 005 A A A 5/0/0 5/0/0 5/0/0 Order of indication Check/Rev. details 6- Form 00 A Form 00 A - Form box 5/0/0 5/0/0 00/007 Delete

119 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS It is possible to change the order of display for the registered forms. To do so, touch the Order of indication key, and then touch the Sort by date key (and select either New R Old or Old R New ) or the Sort by name key (and select either A R Z or Z R A ), as appropriate. Deleting a registered form Perform the following procedure when you want to delete a registered form. Press the [ ] key. The screen will be displayed. Check the displayed information. If you want to print out the selected form, touch the Form key. If you want to change the name of the selected form, touch the Change form name key and then enter the new name. Check/Correct details Item Details User name name Size Orig. set direction Input source Resolution Registration date Form 00 x7" Edge 600dpi 5/0/'0 :06 - Form box - Box editing Change form name Form Touch the Box Editing key under Form Box. The Box editing screen will be displayed. function. 5/0/'0 9:0 Check/revice details Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box Item User name name Size Orig. set direction Input source Resolution Registration date - Form box - Box editing Details FORM007 A Edge 600dpi 5/0/'0 :06 Change form name Form reg. Box Editing printing reg. Box Editing printing Form reg. Box Editing function. 5/0/'0 9:0 Refer to. Entering characters on page 7-0 for information on entering characters. Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box registr. printing registr. printing Form registr. Box Editing Box Editing Box Editing 5 ce you have finished checking the information for that form, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. If you want to check the information for another registered form, repeat steps through 5. the form that you want to delete and then touch the Delete key. A verification screen will be displayed. Box editing 6 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. Form Form 005 Form 00 Form 00 Form 00 Form 00 x8 /" 0/0/9 x8 /" 0/0/9 8 /x" 0/0/9 x8 /" 0/0/9 x8 /" 0/0/9 00/005 Order of indication Conf/Crrt. details Delete - Form box Box editing Form Form 007 Form 006 Form 005 A A A 5/0/0 5/0/0 5/0/0 Order of indication Check/Rev. details Form 00 Form 00 A A 5/0/0 5/0/0 00/007 Delete - Form box 6-

120 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents. To do so, touch the Order of indication key, and then touch the Sort by date key (and select either New R Old or Old R New ) or the Sort by name key (and select either A R Z or Z R A ), as appropriate. Touch the Yes key or the No key, as appropriate. () Shared data box Storing documents in the box Perform the following procedure when you want to register a set of documents in the shared data box. * to 00 sets of documents can be saved in the shared data box. the documents to be stored. Press the [ ] key. The screen will be displayed. Stop Form name : Form 00 This form will be deleted. Do you really want to delete it? Yes No Stop Form name : FORM007 This form will be deleted. Are you sure? Yes No Touch the reg. [ registr. ] key under Shared Data Box. The registration screen will be displayed. If you selected Yes, the selected form will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step. If you selected No, the touch panel will return to the screen in step without deleting the selected form. function. Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box 5/0/'0 9:0 5 If you want to delete another registered form, repeat steps and. reg. Box Editing printing reg. Box Editing printing Form reg. Box Editing 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. function. Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box 5/0/'0 9:0 registr. printing registr. printing Form registr. Box Editing Box Editing Box Editing 6-

121 Touch the Change name key and then enter a name for the documents. If you do not want to register a name for the documents, go directly to the next step. Original Ready to register document(s). x8 /" 8 /x" Place originals then press Start key. 5/0/'0 9:0 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS ing out stored documents Perform the following procedure when you want to print out documents that are stored in a shared data box. Press the [ ] key. The screen will be displayed. registration Cancel Shared Data Box s Job006 sided Original type size 00% regi. size Reduce /Enlarge Edge Orig. set direction Change name Basic Quality Edit Ready to register document(s). original. Press Start key. registration Original A A 5/0/'0 9:0 Job cancel Shared Data Box s Job00 Change name size orig. size regi. size -sided Original type 00% Reduce/ Enlarge Edge Orig. set direction Basic Quality Edit Touch the printing key under Shared Data Box. The printing screen will be displayed. Refer to. Entering characters on page 7-0 for information on entering characters. function. Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box reg. printing reg. printing Form reg. 5/0/'0 9:0 Box Editing Box Editing Box Editing 5 Touch the [ size orig. ] key, the regi. size key, the Original type key, the Reduce/ Enlarge key and/or the Orig.set direction key, if you want to perform the corresponding settings. If you want to access the Scanning density key and/or the Orig.image quality [ Image quality ] key to make those settings, touch the Quality key. If you want to set access the Border Erase [ Erase Mode ] key and/or the Continuous scanning [ Multiple scanning ] key to make those settings, touch the Edit key. function. Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box registr. Box Editing printing registr. Box Editing printing Form registr. Box Editing 5/0/'0 9:0 6 7 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the documents will start. ce all of the documents have been completely scanned, the touch panel will return to the screen in step. If you want to register another document, repeat steps through 6. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. the documents to be printed out and then touch the Finish selecting key. printing data box Job 005 Job 00 Job 00 Job 00 Job 00 5/0/0 5/0/0 5/0/0 5/0/0 5/0/0 00/00 Order of indication Conf/Crrt. details Cancel Finish selecting - Shared Data Box printing Job cancel data box JOB00 JOB00 JOB00 5/0/0 5/0/0 5/0/0 Order of indication Check/Rev. details 00/00 Finish ing - Shared Data Box 6-5

122 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents. To do so, touch the Order of indication key, and then touch the Sort by date key (and select either New R Old or Old R New ) or the Sort by name key (and select either A R Z or Z R A ), as appropriate. Touch the paper key, the Sort/Finished key and/or the sided/ sided key, to perform the corresponding settings. If you want to access the Form Overlay key, the Margin key, the Cover Mode key, the Page # [ Page numbering ] key, the Booklet key and/or the of Output key to make those settings, touch the Edit key. Checking stored documents and changing their names Perform the following procedure when you want to verify the name of stored documents, the size of the original documents or the date and time they were stored in the shared data box, or when you want to print out the first page of those document in order to check them. You can also use this procedure to change the registered name for the documents. Press the [ ] key. The screen will be displayed. 5 Press the [Start] key. out will start. Touch the printing key or the Box Editing key under Shared Data Box. The printing screen or the Box editing screen, as appropriate, will be displayed. function. 5/0/'0 9:0 Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box reg. printing reg. printing Form reg. Box Editing Box Editing Box Editing function. 5/0/'0 9:0 Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box registr. printing registr. printing Form registr. Box Editing Box Editing Box Editing 6-6

123 the documents that you want to check and then touch the Cont/Crrt. details [ Check/Rev. details ] key. The Check/Correct details [ Check/revice details ] screen will be displayed. Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 5 ce you have finished checking the information for those documents, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. If you want to check the information for other stored documents, repeat steps through 5. Box editing data box Job 005 Job 00 Job 00 Job 00 Job 00 5/0/0 5/0/0 5/0/0 5/0/0 5/0/0 00/00 Order of indication Cont/Crrt. details Delete 6 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. - Shared Data Box Box editing data box JOB00 JOB00 JOB00 5/0/0 5/0/0 5/0/0 Order of indication Check/Rev. details Delete 00/00 - Shared Data Box It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents. To do so, touch the Order of indication key, and then touch the Sort by date key (and select either New R Old or Old R New ) or the Sort by name key (and select either A R Z or Z R A ), as appropriate. Check the displayed information. If you want to print out the first page of the selected documents, touch the from st [ Head ] key. If you want to change the name of the selected documents, touch the Change doc.name key and then enter the new name. Check/Correct details Item Details User name name Job005 Registration size x5" Orig. set direction Edge page # Input source Resolution 600dpi Registration date '5/0/0 :9 Change doc. name from st - Shared Data Box - Box editing Check/revise details Item Details User name name Job006 Registration size A Orig. set direction Edge page # Input source Resolution 600dpi Registration date '5/0/0 :9 Change doc. name Head print - Shared Data Box - Box editing Refer to. Entering characters on page 7-0 for information on entering characters. 6-7

124 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Deleting stored documents Perform the following procedure when you want to delete stored documents. Press the [ ] key. The screen will be displayed. It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents. To do so, touch the Order of indication key, and then touch the Sort by date key (and select either New R Old or Old R New ) or the Sort by name key (and select either A R Z or Z R A ), as appropriate. Touch the Yes key or the No key, as appropriate. Stop name : JOB 005 This document(s) will be deleted. Do you want to delete it? Yes No Touch the Box Editing key under Shared Data Box. The Box editing screen will be displayed. Stop function. Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box 5/0/'0 9:0 name :JOB00 This document will be deleted. Are you sure? reg. printing reg. printing Form reg. Yes No Box Editing Box Editing Box Editing function. 5/0/'0 9:0 If you selected Yes, the selected documents will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step. If you selected No, the touch panel will return to the screen in step without deleting the selected documents. Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box registr. printing registr. printing Form registr. 5 If you want to delete other stored documents, repeat steps and. Box Editing Box Editing Box Editing the documents that you want to delete and then touch the Delete key. A verification screen will be displayed. 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. Box editing data box Job 005 Job 00 Job 00 5/0/0 5/0/0 5/0/0 Order of indication Cont/Crrt. details Job 00 Job 00 5/0/0 5/0/0 00/00 Delete - Shared Data Box Box editing data box JOB00 JOB00 JOB00 5/0/0 5/0/0 5/0/0 Order of indication Check/Rev. details Delete 00/00 - Shared Data Box 6-8

125 () Synergy print boxes Storing documents in a box Perform the following procedure when you want to register a set of documents in a synergy print box. the documents to be stored. Press the [ ] key. The screen will be displayed. Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Either touch the synergy print box in which you want to register the documents, or enter its number using the keypad. Then touch the Enter key. The registration screen will be displayed. registration box No. 00 ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ MNOP_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ QRST_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_ Synergy Box /5 Cancel Box No. (with #key) Enter registration box No. 00 ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ MNOP_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ QRST_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_05000 / 5 Job cancel Box No. (with # key) Enter - Synergy Box Touch the reg. [ registr. ] key under Synergy Box. The screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed. 5 Touch the Change name key and then enter a name for the documents. If you do not want to register a name for the documents, go directly to the next step. function. Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box reg. Box Editing printing reg. Box Editing printing Form reg. Box Editing 5/0/'0 9:0 Ready to register document(s). Place originals then press Start key. registration 007 s Job00 Change name size 00% regi. size sided Original type Reduce /Enlarge Original x8 /" 8 /x" 5/0/'0 9:0 Cancel Eage Orig. set direction Basic Quality Edit function. Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box registr. Box Editing printing registr. Box Editing printing Form registr. Box Editing 5/0/'0 9:0 registration 007 Ready to register document(s). s Job00 original. Press Start key. Change name size orig. size regi. size Basic -sided Original type 00% Reduce/ Enlarge Quality Original A A 5/0/'0 9:0 Job cancel Edge Orig. set direction Edit Refer to. Entering characters on page 7-0 for information on entering characters. 6-9

126 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 6 Touch the [ size orig. ] key, the regi. size key, the Original type key, the Reduce/ Enlarge key and/or the Orig.set direction key, if you want to perform the corresponding settings. If you want to access the Scanning density key and/or the Orig.image quality [ Image quality ] key to make those settings, touch the Quality key. If you want to set access the Border Erase [ Erase Mode ] key and/or the Continuous scanning [ Multiple scanning ] key to make those settings, touch the Edit key. Combining and printing out stored documents Perform the following procedure when you want to combine and print out documents that are stored in a synergy print box. Press the [ ] key. The screen will be displayed. 7 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the documents will start. ce all of the documents have been completely scanned, the touch panel will return to the screen in step. If you want to register another document, repeat steps through 7. 8 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. Touch the printing key under Synergy Box. The screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed. function. 5/0/'0 9:0 Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box reg. printing reg. printing Form reg. Box Editing Box Editing Box Editing function. 5/0/'0 9:0 Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box registr. printing registr. printing Form registr. Box Editing Box Editing Box Editing 6-0

127 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Either touch the synergy print box that contains the documents to be printed out, or enter its number using the keypad. Then touch the Enter key. The printing screen will be displayed. the document sets in order of how you want them printed. to 0 sets of documents can be selected. printing Cancel printing box No. 00 ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ MNOP_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_00005 Cancel Box No. (with #key) : JOB005 JOB00 JOB00 WED 5: WED 5: WED 5: Order of indication Conf/Crrt. details once all data 00 IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ QRST_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_05000 JOB00 JOB00 WED 5:5 WED 5:7 00/005 / Cancel Finish selecting / 5 Enter - Synergy Box - Synergy Box printing Job cancel ineg box No. 00 ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ MNOP_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ QRST_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_05000 Job cancel Box No. (with # key) Box ABCDEFGHIJK : JOB005 WED 5: JOB00 WED 5: JOB00 WED 5: JOB00 WED 5:5 JOB00 WED 5:7 00/005 Order of indication Check/ Rev. details / Cancel once all data Finish selecting / 5 Enter - Synergy Box - Synergy Box S If that box was registered with a password, the password entry screen will be displayed. Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the Enter key. S It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents. To do so, touch the Order of indication key, and then touch the Sort by date key (and select either New R Old or Old R New ) or the Sort by name key (and select either A R Z or Z R A ), as appropriate. If you want to print out more than one set of documents, they must all be of the same size. Enter password. Stop Password ******** 007 Enter password. Clear (Enter by #key) Enter Stop 5 Touch the paper key, the Sort/Finished key and/or the sided/ sided key, to perform the corresponding settings. If you want to access the Form Overlay key, the Margin key, the Cover Mode key, the Page # key, the Booklet key and/or the of Output key to make those settings, touch the Edit key. Password ******** (Enter #-key) 6 Press the [Start] key. out will start. Clear Enter 007 Box Name ABCDEFG Refer to 7 ing a password for a box on page 6-8 for information on registering the password. 6-

128 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS ing out the full contents of a box Perform the following procedure when you want to print out all of the documents that are stored in a synergy print box at one time. Press the [ ] key. The screen will be displayed. S If that box was registered with a password, the password entry screen will be displayed. Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the Enter key. Enter password. Stop Password ******** (Enter by #key) Clear Enter 007 Enter password. Stop Touch the printing key under Synergy Box. The screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed. Password ******** Clear (Enter #-key) Enter 007 Box Name ABCDEFG function. 5/0/'0 9:0 Refer to 7 ing a password for a box on page 6-8 for information on registering the password. Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box reg. Box Editing printing reg. Box Editing printing Form reg. Box Editing Touch the once all data key. out will start. ce printing is completed, the touch panel will return to the screen in step. function. 5/0/'0 9:0 printing Cancel Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box 007 : 0 Job 005 WED 5: Job 00 WED 5: Job 00 WED 5: Order of indication Conf/Crrt. details once all data registr. Box Editing printing registr. Box Editing printing Form registr. Box Editing Job 00 WED 5:5 Job 00 WED 5:7 00/005 - Synergy Box / Cancel Finish selecting Either touch the synergy print box that contains the documents to be printed out, or enter its number using the keypad. Then touch the Enter key. The printing screen will be displayed. printing box No. 00 ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ MNOP_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_00005 Cancel Box No. (with #key) printing 007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK : 0 JOB005 WED 5: JOB00 WED 5: JOB00 WED 5: JOB00 WED 5:5 JOB00 WED 5:7 00/005 - Synergy Box Order of indication Check/ Rev. details / Cancel Job cancel once all data Finish selecting 00 IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ QRST_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_05000 / 5 Enter 5 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. - Synergy Box ineg box No. 00 ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ MNOP_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ QRST_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_05000 / 5 Job cancel Box No. (with # key) Enter 6- - Synergy Box

129 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Checking stored documents and changing their names Perform the following procedure when you want to verify the name of stored documents, the size of the original documents or the date and time they were stored in the synergy print box, or when you want to print out the first page of those document in order to check them. You can also use this procedure to change the registered name for the documents. Press the [ ] key. The screen will be displayed. Either touch the synergy print box that contains the documents to be printed out, or enter its number using the keypad. Then touch the Enter key. The printing screen or the Box editing screen, as appropriate, will be displayed. Box editing box No. 00 ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ MNOP_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ QRST_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_05000 Cancel Box No. (with #key) / 5 Enter - Synergy Box Box editing box No. 00 ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ MNOP_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ QRST_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_05000 / 5 Job cancel Box No. (with # key) Enter Touch the printing key or the Box Editing key under Synergy Box. The screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed. function. Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box 5/0/'0 9:0 S - Synergy Box If that box was registered with a password, the password entry screen will be displayed. Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the Enter key. Enter password. Stop reg. printing reg. printing Form reg. Box Editing Box Editing Box Editing Password ******** (Enter by #key) Clear function. 5/0/'0 9:0 007 Enter Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box Enter password. Stop registr. printing registr. printing Form registr. Box Editing Box Editing Box Editing Password ******** (Enter #-key) Clear Enter 007 Box Name ABCDEFG Refer to 7 ing a password for a box on page 6-8 for information on registering the password. 6-

130 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS the documents that you want to check and then touch the Conf/Correct details [ Check/Rev. details ] key. The Check/Correct details [ Check/revise details ] screen will be displayed. Refer to. Entering characters on page 7-0 for information on entering characters. Box editing 007 JOB005 JOB00 JOB00 JOB00 JOB00 WED 5: WED 5: WED 5: WED 5:5 WED 5:7 00/005 Order of indication Conf/Crrt details Delete Delete all data / box Box Password 6 ce you have finished checking the information for those documents, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. If you want to check the information for other stored documents, repeat steps through 6. - Synergy Box Box editing 007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK JOB005 WED 5: JOB00 WED 5: JOB00 WED 5: Order of indication Check/ Rev. details Delete all box data Box Password 7 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. JOB00 JOB00 WED 5:5 WED 5:7 Delete 00/005 - Synergy Box It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents. To do so, touch the Order of indication key, and then touch the Sort by date key (and select either New R Old or Old R New ) or the Sort by name key (and select either A R Z or Z R A ), as appropriate. 5 Check the displayed information. If you want to print out the first page of the selected documents, touch the from st [ Head print ] key. If you want to change the name of the selected documents, touch the Change doc.name key and then enter the new name. Check/Correct details Item Details User name name Job006 Registration size x8 /" Orig. set direction Edge page # Input source Resolution 600dpi Registration date '5/0/0 :9 Change doc. name from st - Synergy Box - Box editing Check/revise details Item Details User name name Job006 Registration size A Orig. set direction Edge page # Input source Resolution 600dpi Registration date '5/0/0 :9 Change doc. name Head print - Synergy Box - Box editing 6-

131 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 5 Deleting stored documents from a box Perform the following procedure when you want to delete stored documents. Press the [ ] key. The screen will be displayed. S If that box was registered with a password, the password entry screen will be displayed. Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the Enter key. Enter password. Stop Password ******** (Enter by #key) Clear Enter 007 Enter password. Stop Touch the Box Editing key under Synergy Box. The screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed. Password ******** Clear (Enter #-key) 007 Box Name ABCDEFG Enter function. Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box 5/0/'0 9:0 Refer to 7 ing a password for a box on page 6-8 for information on registering the password. reg. Box Editing printing reg. Box Editing printing Form reg. Box Editing the documents that you want to delete and then touch the Delete key. A verification screen will be displayed. function. 5/0/'0 9:0 Box editing Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box 007 JOB005 JOB00 JOB00 WED 5: WED 5: WED 5: Order of indication Conf/Crrt details Delete all data / box Box Password registr. Box Editing printing registr. Box Editing printing Form registr. Box Editing JOB00 WED 5:5 JOB00 WED 5:7 00/005 - Synergy Box Delete Either touch the synergy print box that contains the documents to be deleted, or enter its number using the keypad. Then touch the Enter key. The Box editing screen will be displayed. Box editing box No. 00 ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ MNOP_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ QRST_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_ Synergy Box Box editing box No. 00 ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ MNOP_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ QRST_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_05000 / 5 Cancel Box No. (with #key) Enter Job cancel Box No. (with # key) Box editing 007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK JOB005 JOB00 JOB00 JOB00 JOB00 - Synergy Box WED 5: WED 5: WED 5: WED 5:5 WED 5:7 00/005 Order of indication Check/ Rev. details Delete Delete all box data Box Password It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents. To do so, touch the Order of indication key, and then touch the Sort by date key (and select either New R Old or Old R New ) or the Sort by name key (and select either A R Z or Z R A ), as appropriate. / 5 Enter - Synergy Box 6-5

132 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 5 Touch the Yes key or the No key, as appropriate. 6 Deleting the full contents of a box Perform the following procedure when you want to delete the full contents of a synergy print box in one step. Stop name : Job 005 This document(s) will be deleted. Do you want to delete it? Press the [ ] key. The screen will be displayed. Yes No Stop name : JOB005 This document will be deleted. Are you sure? Yes No If you selected Yes, the selected documents will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step. If you selected No, the touch panel will return to the screen in step without deleting the selected documents. Touch the Box editing key under Synergy Box. The screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed. function. 5/0/'0 9:0 6 If you want to delete other stored documents, repeat steps and 5. Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box 7 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. reg. Box Editing printing function. reg. Box Editing printing Form reg. Box Editing 5/0/'0 9:0 Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box registr. printing registr. printing Form registr. Box Editing Box Editing Box Editing Either touch the synergy print box that contains the documents to be deleted, or enter its number using the keypad. Then touch the Enter key. The Box editing screen will be displayed. Box editing box No. 00 ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ MNOP_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ QRST_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_05000 / 5 Cancel Box No. (with #key) Enter - Synergy Box Box editing box No. 00 ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ MNOP_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ QRST_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_05000 / 5 Job cancel Box No. (with # key) Enter - Synergy Box 6-6

133 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS S If that box was registered with a password, the password entry screen will be displayed. Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the Enter key. 5 Touch the Yes key or the No key, as appropriate. Stop Enter password. Stop Number: 0 All data in box will be deleted. Do you want to delete? Yes No Password ******** (Enter by #key) Clear Enter Stop 007 Enter password. Stop Number : 5 All data in box will be deleted. Are you sure? Are you sure? Yes No Password ******** (Enter #-key) 007 Box Name ABCDEFG Refer to 7 ing a password for a box on page 6-8 for information on registering the password. Clear Touch the Delete all data / box [ Delete all box data ] key. A verification screen will be displayed. Enter 6 If you selected Yes, the entire contents of the selected box will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step. If you selected No, the touch panel will return to the screen in step without deleting any documents. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. Box editing 007 JOB005 JOB00 JOB00 WED 5: WED 5: WED 5: Order of indication Conf/Crrt details Delete all data / box Box Password JOB00 JOB00 WED 5:5 WED 5:7 Delete 00/005 - Synergy Box Box editing 007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK JOB005 JOB00 JOB00 WED 5: WED 5: WED 5: Order of indication Check/ Rev. details Delete all box data Box Password JOB00 JOB00 WED 5:5 WED 5:7 Delete 00/005 - Synergy Box 6-7

134 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 7 ing a password for a box For security and privacy purposes, you can register a password for each synergy print box. In this case, it will be necessary to enter the registered password in order to print out, check or delete any documents stored in that box. Perform the following procedure when you want to change the password settings for any box. Press the [ ] key. The screen will be displayed. Either touch the synergy print box that you want to set the password for, or enter its number using the keypad. Then touch the Enter key. The Box editing screen will be displayed. Box editing box No. 00 ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ MNOP_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ QRST_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_05000 Cancel Box No. (with #key) / 5 Enter - Synergy Box Box editing box No. 00 ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ MNOP_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_ QRST_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_05000 / 5 Job cancel Box No. (with # key) Enter Touch the Box Editing key under Synergy Box. The screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed. function. Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box 5/0/'0 9:0 - Synergy Box If that box was registered with a password, the password entry screen will be displayed. Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the Enter key. reg. printing reg. printing Form reg. Enter password. Stop Box Editing Box Editing Box Editing Password ******** Clear (Enter by #key) function. 5/0/'0 9:0 Enter 007 Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box registr. printing registr. printing Form registr. Enter password. Stop Box Editing Box Editing Box Editing Password ******** (Enter #-key) Clear Enter 007 Box Name ABCDEFG 6-8

135 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Touch the Box Password key. A verification screen will be displayed. Box editing 007 JOB005 JOB00 JOB00 WED 5: WED 5: WED 5: Order of indication Conf/Crrt details Delete all data / box Box Password JOB00 JOB00 WED 5:5 WED 5:7 Delete 00/005 - Synergy Box Box editing 007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK JOB005 JOB00 JOB00 WED 5: WED 5: WED 5: Order of indication Check/ Rev. details Delete all box data Box Password JOB00 JOB00 WED 5:5 WED 5:7 Delete 00/005 - Synergy Box 5 Use the keypad to enter the new password for that box and then touch the Enter key. The new password will be registered and the touch panel will return to the screen in step. Box Password Stop Enter password. New password (Enter by #key) Clear Enter 007 Box Password Stop Enter password New password ******** (Enter #-key) Clear Enter 007 Box Name ABCDEFG S The password can be between and 8 digits long. If you decide not to register a password for that box, touch the Clear key and then, with nothing entered in the password field, touch the Enter key. 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. 6-9

136 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS. Output management functions () What are the output management functions? The Output management functions use the status screen to manage printing conditions. Objective When you want to know how many jobs are scheduled to be printed before yours. Procedure You can verify the documents that are waiting to be printed by checking the status screen. The jobs in the list are printed in order from the top down, so you can easily see in which order your documents will be printed. * The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation. When you want to know whether or not your job (scheduled using the job reservation function) was printed. Check the status screen. If your job IS in the status screen, that job has not yet been printed. * The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation. When you are using the printer functions of this copier to print out data from a computer, or using the fax functions of this copier to receive fax data, and you want know the status of your print job. With the output management functions, jobs using the printer functions of this copier to print out data from a computer or using the fax functions of this copier to receive fax data are displayed just like any other copy job. These print jobs can be verified just like copy jobs by checking the status screen. (A icon under the Job heading indicates a copy job, a icon indicates a print job, and a icon indicates a fax job.) When you want to check the contents of a copy job that is waiting to be printed. The number of originals, number of copies to be made, the date the job was scheduled, and the status of printing can all be verified in the status screen. In addition, if you need even more detailed information on any particular job, just select that job and touch the Conf/Crrt. details [ Check/ Correct details ] key to display the e size of the paper the job will be output to and, if it has been designated, the location of ejection of the finished copies. * The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation. When you want to force-print a copy job that is waiting to be printed immediately. the job that you want to print immediately in the status screen and touch the Move ahead [ Move up ] key to move that job upwards to the top of the list. * It is only possible to change the printing order for copy jobs. It is not possible to move copy jobs ahead of print and fax jobs. * The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation. OR, select the job that you want to print immediately in the status screen and touch the Interrupt print key to stop the job that is currently being printed and start print out for the selected job. * The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to force-print a copy job. When you want to cancel a copy job that is waiting to be printed. the job that you want to cancel in the status screen and touch the Cancel/Delete key. The selected job will be canceled. * The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation. 6-0

137 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS The following operations can be managed. When the optional Hard Disk is NOT installed Check print status Change the print order Interrupt printing (force-print) Cancel / Delete Check job contents job or Fax job When the optional Hard Disk IS installed Check print status Change the print order Interrupt printing (force-print) Cancel / Delete Check job contents job * or Fax job * or fax jobs will automatically be moved to a position immediately after the job currently being printed. It is not possible to move copy jobs ahead of print and fax jobs. () Display of the output management functions Press the [Job Queue] key. The status screen will be displayed. management Job Input source Original Registration State /0 :00 ing er _ Waiting 7 Fax _ Waiting 8 5 0/0 :00 Waiting Move ahead Move behind interrupt print Cancel/ Delete Conf/Crrt. details Prt status 0/0 :50 management Job Input source Original Registration State /0 :00 ing er _ Waiting 7 Fax _ Waiting 8 5 0/0 :00 Waiting Move up Move down interrupt print Cancel / Delete Check/ Rev. details Prnt status 0/0 :50 6-

138 Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS () The status screen This screen displays the currently set printing conditions and the job queue of documents waiting to be printed management management Job Input source Original Registration State Job Input source Original Registration State /0 :00 ing /0 :00 ing er _ Waiting er _ Waiting 7 Fax _ Waiting 7 Fax _ Waiting 8 5 0/0 :00 Waiting 8 5 0/0 :00 Waiting Move ahead Move behind interrupt print Cancel/ Delete Conf/Crrt. details Move up Move down interrupt print Cancel / Delete Check/ Rev. details Prt status 0/0 :50 Prnt status 0/0 : Job queue Displays information about each job in the queue. The job at the top of the list is that job that is currently being printed. The rest of the jobs will be printed in order from the top down. A icon under the Job heading indicates a copy job, a icon indicates a print job, and a icon indicates a fax job. Move ahead key Touching this key moves the currently selected (highlighted) job upward in the job queue. A job can be moved as far as the second highest position in the list. In this case, print out for that job will begin as soon as the current job is completed. (This is only available when the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier.) Move behind [ Move down ] key Touching this key moves the currently selected (highlighted) job downward in the job queue. (This is only available when the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier.) Interrupt print key Touching this key interrupts the job that is currently being printed and start print out for the currently selected (highlighted) job. (The selected job will be moved to the top of the list.) 5 Cancel/Delete key Touching this key cancels the currently selected (highlighted) job and deletes it from the job queue. (This is only available when the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier.) 6 Conf/Crrt.details [ Check/Rev. details ] key Touching this key displays the Check/Correct details [ Check/ revise details ] screen, enabling you, for example, to check the contents of, or change the number of copies to be made for, the currently selected (highlighted) job. (This is only available when the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier.) Check/Correct details Item Orig. page size Input source Registration date Job 5 Check/revise details Item Original size Input source Registration date Job 5 x8 /" /0 5: A /0 5: Details Details Change Preset Change Preset 7 M and N cursor keys Use these keys to select a job from the job queue. 8 key Touching this key quits the output management function. In this case, the touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. 6-

139 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS. management mode By registering a different department ID-code for each individual department that uses the copier, the copy management function will help you manage the overall number of copies made by each department. The copy management function in this copier offers the following features. Manage use of all optional functions (printer, scanner and fax) utilized by the same department ID-code. Manage up to 00 individual departments. ( to 000 when the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier.) department ID-codes of up to 8 digits (between 0 and ). Check the total number of copies made under all department ID-codes as a whole or by each individual department. copy limits to any -page increment up to 999,999. Clear the copy counts for all department ID-codes at one time or for each individual department. Check copy counts for your own department without the need to enter the management code. Just enter the corresponding department ID-code. IMPORTANT! In order to access the Change restrictions for use procedure under Editing copy management information, it is necessary to select under Copier function management ON/OFF. When the optional er Kit, er/scanner Kit or Fax Kit are installed in your copier, it is necessary to select under the corresponding er function management ON/OFF, Scanner function management ON/OFF or Fax function management ON/OFF procedure. (See (6) Changing the copy management settings on page 7-5.) 7-

140 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS () management procedures Procedure Description Reference page Editing copy management information new department ID-codes Perform this procedure when you want to register a new department ID-code and set the restrictions for using the copier under that ID-code. to 00 department ID-codes can be registered. (When the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier, up to 000 department ID-codes can be registered.) 7- Delete department ID-codes Perform this procedure when you want to delete registered department ID-codes. 7-6 Change registered information Perform this procedure when you want to change a department name or the corresponding ID-code. 7-7 Change restrictions for use Perform this procedure when you want to change the restrictions for using the copier under each department ID-code. 7-0 Checking the copy management counts Check all departments Perform this procedure when you want to check the total number of copies made under all department ID-codes as a whole, print out a copy management report and clear the copy counts for all of the registered department ID-codes. 7- Check individual departments Perform this procedure when you want to check the total number of copies made under each individual department ID-code and/or clear the copy counts for individual departments as well. 7- Turning the copy management function ON/OFF Perform this procedure and touch the key when you want to turn the copy management function ON, or touch the key to turn the copy management function OFF. 7-5 Changing the copy management settings Perform this procedure when you want to change the settings for the copy management function

141 () Accessing the copy management menu screen Perform the following procedure in order to access the copy management menu screen. With the content of the Basic tab displayed, press the [Default ting/] key. The screen will be displayed. Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the -digit management code. The factory management code for 0 cpm copiers is 000, for 0 cpm copiers is 000 and for 50 cpm copiers is If the entered management code matches the currently registered one, the copy management menu screen will be displayed. Enter the administrator number Enter the administrator number Touch the key on the right side of the touch panel. / Machine Language setting BOX report check User Adjustment Touch the key that corresponds to the desired procedure. The setting screen for that procedure will be displayed. / Managem. Total /t. total Each Mgt. Total edit Def.. Language setting Hard Disk check Machine report User Adjustment Managem. Total /t. total Each Mgt. Total edit Def.. S It is possible for you to change the -digit management code. (See Changing the management code on page 7-56.) Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired setting. 7-

142 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS () Editing copy management information Touch the key. The New register screen will be displayed. new department ID-codes Perform the following procedure when you want to register department ID-codes (up to 8-digits per ID-code) and the corresponding department name, and set certain restrictions for using the copier under that ID-code. Access the copy management menu screen. (See Accessing the copy management menu screen.) edit Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use / edit Machine Language setting BOX report check User Adjustment Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use - / Language ID-code under the ting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The ID-code screen will be displayed. setting Hard Disk check Machine report User Adjustment New register Cancel ting item Value Touch the edit key. The edit screen will be displayed. ID-code Name to display (No register) (No register) Next - - edit Managem. Total /t. New register Job cancel total Each Mgt. Total edit Def.. ting item ID-code Name to display (No register) (No register) Value Next - - edit Managem. Total /t. total Each Mgt. Total edit Def.. 7-

143 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 5 Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the department ID-code that you want to register (up to 8 digits). You can enter any number between 0 and Enter the name for that department, and then touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. ID-code Name to display Stop (0~ ) ID-code 0007 st Sales Dept. Limit: letters including # AllDel = ` q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ Del. prev Clear a s d f g h j k l ; z x c v b n m,. / ' - edit - New register Capital Letter Num./Sym. Space ID-code Name to display Stop (0~ ) ID-code 0007 st Sales Dept. Limit: letters inc. # key AllDel = ` q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ Del. prev ` Clear a s d f g h j k l ; z x c v b n m,. / ' - edit - New register Capital Letter Symbol Symbol Space 6 7 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Name to display under the ting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Name to display screen will be displayed. For information on how to enter the department name, refer to. Entering characters on page ce you are finished registering that department's ID-code and name, touch the Next key. New register Cancel ting item Value New register Cancel ID-code Name to display 0007 (No register) ting item Value ID-code 0007 Name to display st Sales Dept. Next - - edit Next - - edit New register Job cancel ting item Value ID-code Name to display 0007 (No register) New register Job cancel Next ting item Value ID-code 0007 Name to display st Sales Dept. - - edit Next - - edit S Be sure to register both of the setting items above, If you do not, an error will occur and you will be unable to continue to the next step. If you attempt to register a department ID-code or a department name that is already registered, an error will occur and you will be unable to continue to the next step. In this case, select a different IDcode and/or name, as appropriate. 7-5

144 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 0 the restrictions for using the copier under that department ID-code. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. New register Cancel edit 0007 st Sales Dept. ting item limitation er limitation Output limitation Scanner limitation Fax Transm. Limitation No limit No limit No limit No limit Value Registr. Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. st Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 00/0 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use - - edit - New register Job cancel edit 0007 st Sales Dept. ting item limitation er limitation Output limitation Scanner limitation Fax Transm. Limitation No limit No limit No limit No limit Value Registr. Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. st Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 00/0 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use - - edit - For information on how to set restrictions, refer to ting the restrictions for use on page 7-7. If you want to register an ID-code for a new department, touch the key and repeat steps through. ce you are finished setting the restrictions for that department ID-code, touch the Registr. key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. New register Cancel 0007 st Sales Dept. ting item Value limitation er limitation Output limitation Scanner limitation Fax Transm. Limitation No limit No limit No limit No limit Registr. - - edit New register Job cancel 0007 st Sales Dept. ting item Value limitation er limitation Output limitation Scanner limitation Fax Transm. Limitation No limit No limit No limit No limit Registr. - - edit 7-6

145 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS ting the restrictions for use Perform the following procedure when you want to set certain restrictions for using the copier under each department ID-code. The setting items available for restriction will differ depending upon whether you have selected All or Each as the /er output management setting. (See /er output management on page 7-0.) The following settings are available. If All is selected as the /er output management setting ( All is the factory setting) Copier er Scanning Fax transmission Reference page ing privileges ON/OFF 7-8 ing privileges ON/OFF 7-9 Output limitation m m 7-0 Scanning restrictions 7- Fax transmission restrictions 7- : The available settings are No limit, limit and Is not permitted m: The available settings are No limit and limit : The available settings are Can use and Is not permitted If Each is selected as the /er output management setting Copier er Scanning Fax transmission Reference page ing restrictions ing restrictions Scanning restrictions Fax transmission restrictions : The available settings are No limit, limit and Is not permitted 7-7

146 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS ing privileges ON/OFF Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copying privileges ON or OFF for the corresponding department ID-code. This setting will only be available when is selected as the Copier function management ON/OFF setting. To allow copying privileges for this ID-code, touch the Can use key. To cancel copying privileges completely, touch the Is not permitted key. limitation Can use Is not permitted Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting items. (See new department ID-codes on page 7- or Change restrictions for use on page 7-0.) - edit - New register limitation edit Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use Can use Is not permited - edit - New register - edit Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. - limitation under the ting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The limitation screen will be displayed. Limit in use 0007 st Sales Dept. ting item Value limitation er limitation Output limitation Scanner limitation Fax Transm. Limitation No limit No limit No limit - - edit Limit in use 0007 st Sales Dept. ting item Value limitation er limitation Output limitation Scanner limitation Fax Transm. Limitation No limit No limit No limit - - edit 7-8

147 ing privileges ON/OFF Perform the following procedure when the optional er Kit or er/scanner Kit is installed in your copier and you want to turn printing privileges ON or OFF for the corresponding department IDcode. Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS To allow printing privileges for this ID-code, touch the Can use key. To cancel printing privileges completely, touch the Is not permitted key. er limitation This setting will only be available when is selected as the er function management ON/OFF setting. Can use Is not permitted - edit - New register Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting items. (See new department ID-codes on page 7- or Change restrictions for use on page 7-0.) er limitation Can use edit Is not permited Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use - edit - New register If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. edit Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. - er limitation under the ting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The er limitation screen will be displayed. Limit in use 0007 st Sales Dept. ting item Value limitation er limitation Output limitation Scanner limitation Fax Transm. Limitation No limit No limit No limit - - edit Limit in use 0007 st Sales Dept. ting item Value limitation er limitation Output limitation Scanner limitation Fax Transm. Limitation No limit No limit No limit - - edit 7-9

148 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Output limitation Perform the following procedure when you want to set the maximum number of copies and printouts that can be made under the corresponding department ID-code. If the optional er Kit or er/scanner Kit is installed in your copier, this limit will apply to the number of copies AND printouts that can be made in total. Output limitation under the ting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Output limitation screen will be displayed. Limit in use This setting will not be available when Is not permitted is selected for both the ing privileges ON/OFF and the ing privileges ON/ OFF settings, or when Is not permitted is selected as the ing privileges ON/OFF setting and the optional er Kit or er/ Scanner Kit is NOT installed in your copier st Sales Dept. ting item limitation er limitation Output limitation No limit Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm. Limitation No limit - - edit Value Limit in use Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting items. (See new department ID-codes on page 7- or Change restrictions for use on page 7-0.) 0007 st Sales Dept. ting item limitation er limitation Output limitation Scanner limitation Fax Transm. Limitation No limit No limit No limit Value - - edit edit Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use To set the maximum limit for copying and printing under this ID-code, touch the limit key and proceed to the next step. To allow unlimited copying and printing, touch the No limit key and then proceed to step 5. Output limitation edit Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use No limit limit - edit - New register - Output limitation No limit limit - edit - New register If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. 7-0

149 Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum number of copies and printouts that can be made in total under this ID-code. The limit can be set to any -page increment up to 999,999. Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Scanning restrictions Perform the following procedure when you want to set the maximum number of originals that can be scanned under the corresponding department ID-code when the optional er/scanner Kit is installed in your copier. Output limitation No limit limit (~999,999) Limited value 999,999 Clear This setting will only be available when is selected as the Scanner function management ON/OFF setting. - edit - New register Output limitation Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting items. (See new department ID-codes on page 7- or Change restrictions for use on page 7-0.) 5 No limit limit (~999,999) Limited value - edit - New register 999,999 Clear Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. edit Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use edit Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use - Scanner limitation under the ting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Scanner limitation screen will be displayed. Limit in use 0007 st Sales Dept. ting item Value limitation er limitation Output limitation Scanner limitation Fax Transm. Limitation No limit No limit No limit - - edit Limit in use 0007 st Sales Dept. ting item Value limitation er limitation Output limitation Scanner limitation Fax Transm. Limitation No limit No limit No limit - - edit 7-

150 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS To set the maximum number of originals that can be scanned under this ID-code, touch the limit key and proceed to the next step. To allow unlimited scanning, touch the No limit key, and to cancel scanning privileges completely, touch the Is not permitted key and proceed to step 5. Fax transmission restrictions Perform the following procedure when you want to set the maximum number of documents that can be transmitted under the corresponding department ID-code when the optional Fax Kit is installed in your copier. Scanner limitation This setting will only be available when is selected as the Fax function management ON/OFF setting. No limit limit Is not permitted - edit - New register Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting items. (See new department ID-codes on page 7- or Change restrictions for use on page 7-0.) Scanner limitation edit No limit limit Is not permited - edit - New register Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use - If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum number of originals that can be scanned under this ID-code. The scanning limit can be set to any -page increment up to 999,999. Scanner limitation No limit limit Is not permitted (~999,999) Limited value - edit - New register Scanner limitation 999,999 Clear edit Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use Fax transm. Limitation under the ting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Fax transm. Limitation screen will be displayed. Limit in use 0007 st Sales Dept. ting item limitation er limitation Output limitation Scanner limitation Fax Transm. Limitation No limit No limit No limit Value (~999,999) - - edit No limit limit Is not permited Limited value 999,999 Clear Limit in use - edit - New register 0007 st Sales Dept. ting item Value 5 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. limitation er limitation Output limitation Scanner limitation Fax Transm. Limitation No limit No limit No limit - - edit 7-

151 To set the maximum number of documents that can be transmitted under this ID-code, touch the limit key and proceed to the next step. To allow unlimited fax transmission, touch the No limit key, and to cancel fax transmission privileges completely, touch the Is not permitted key and proceed to step 5. Fax Transm. Limitation Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS ing restrictions Perform the following procedure when you want to set the maximum number of copies that can be made under the corresponding department ID-code. S This setting will only be available when is selected as the Copier function management ON/OFF setting. No limit limit Is not permitted - edit - New register Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting items. (See new department ID-codes on page 7- or Change restrictions for use on page 7-0.) Fax Transm. Limitation edit No limit limit Is not permited - edit - New register Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum number of documents that can be transmitted under this IDcode. The document limit can be set to any -page increment up to 999,999. Fax Transm. Limitation No limit limit Is not permitted (~999,999) Limited value - edit - New register 999,999 Clear edit Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use limitation under the ting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change # key. The limitation screen will be displayed. Limit in use 0007 st Sales Dept. ting item limitation er limitation Scanner limitation Fax Transm. Limitation No limit No limit No limit No limit Value Fax Transm. Limitation - - edit No limit (~999,999) Limited value 999,999 5 limit Is not permited - edit - New register Clear Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Limit in use 0007 st Sales Dept. ting item limitation No limit er limitation No limit Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm. Limitation No limit - - edit Value 7-

152 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS To set the maximum number of copies that can be made under this ID-code, touch the limit key and proceed to the next step. To allow unlimited copies, touch the No limit key, and to cancel copying privileges completely, touch the Is not permitted key and proceed to step 5. ing restrictions Perform the following procedure when the optional er Kit or er/scanner Kit is installed in your copier and you want to set the maximum number of printouts that can be made under the corresponding department ID-code. limitation This setting will only be available when is selected as the er function management ON/OFF setting. No limit limit Is not permitted - edit - New register Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting items. (See new department ID-codes on page 7- or Change restrictions for use on page 7-0.) limitation edit No limit limit Is not permited - edit - New register Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use - If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum number of copies that can be made under this ID-code. The copy limit can be set to any -page increment up to 999,999. edit Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use limitation (~999,999) No limit limit Is not permitted Limited value 999,999 Clear - edit - New register limitation (~999,999) No limit limit Is not permited Limited value 999,999 Clear - edit - New register 5 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. 7-

153 er limitation under the ting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change # key. The er limitation screen will be displayed. Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum number of printouts that can be made under this ID-code. The printing limit can be set to any -page increment up to 999,999. Limit in use er limitation 0007 st Sales Dept. ting item limitation er limitation Scanner limitation Fax Transm. Limitation No limit No limit No limit No limit Value No limit limit Is not permitted (~999,999) Limited value 999,999 Clear - - edit - edit - New register Limit in use er limitation 0007 st Sales Dept. ting item Value (~999,999) limitation er limitation Scanner limitation Fax Transm. Limitation No limit No limit No limit No limit No limit limit Is not permited Limited value 999,999 Clear - - edit - edit - New register To set the maximum number of printouts that can be made under this ID-code, touch the limit key and proceed to the next step. To allow unlimited printing, touch the No limit key, and to cancel printing privileges completely, touch the Is not permitted key and proceed to step 5. 5 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. er limitation No limit limit Is not permitted - edit - New register er limitation No limit limit Is not permited - edit - New register If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. 7-5

154 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Delete department ID-codes Perform the following procedure when you want to delete registered department ID-codes. Access the copy management menu screen. (See () Accessing the copy management menu screen on page 7-.) / the department ID-code that you want to delete, and then touch the Delete key. edit Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use - Language setting BOX check Machine / report User Adjustment edit Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use - Language Machine setting Hard Disk report Touch the edit key. The edit screen will be displayed. check User Adjustment It is possible for you to change the order of how the list of ID-codes is displayed. To so, touch the Order of indication key and then touch the Sort by code key (and select either / 9 or 9 / ) or the Sort by Name key (and select either A / Z or Z / A ), as appropriate. Managem. Total /t. total Each Mgt. Total edit Def.. Managem. Total /t. total Each Mgt. Total edit Def.. 7-6

155 Verify that this is the ID-code that you want to delete, and touch the Yes key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. ID-code: 0007 Name to display: st Sales Dept. Are you sure you want to delete this ID-code? Stop Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Change registered information Perform the following procedure when you want to change a previously registered department name or the corresponding ID-code. Access the copy management menu screen. (See () Accessing the copy management menu screen on page 7-.) / Yes No Language setting BOX check Stop Machine report User Adjustment ID-code: 0007 Name to display: st Sales Dept. Are you sure you want to delete this ID-code? / Yes No Language Machine setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment If you want to delete another ID-code, repeat steps and. 5 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the edit key. The edit screen will be displayed. Managem. Total /t. total Each Mgt. Total edit Def.. Managem. Total /t. total Each Mgt. Total edit Def.. 7-7

156 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS the department ID-code for which you want to change the registered information, and then touch the Mgt. Inf. Correction key. The Department inform. edit [ Department info. Editing ] screen will be displayed. 5 Touch the Clear key to delete the old ID-code. Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the new ID-code (up to 8 digits). ID-code edit (0~ ) Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use ID-code edit Clear ID-code edit (0~ ) Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use To change the registered ID-code, proceed to the next step. To change the registered department name, proceed to step edit ID-code 0007 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Proceed to step 0. Clear ID-code It is possible for you to change the order of how the list of ID-codes is displayed. To so, touch the Order of indication key and then touch the Sort by code key (and select either / 9 or 9 / ) or the Sort by Name key (and select either A / Z or Z / A ), as appropriate. - edit (0~ ) ID-code 0007 Clear ID-code under the ting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The ID-code screen will be displayed. ID-code (0~ ) ID-code 0007 Clear Department inform. edit ting item ID-code Name to display Value 0007 st Sales Dept. - edit - - edit Department info. Editing ting item ID-code Name to display Value 0007 st Sales Dept. - - edit 7-8

157 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 7 Name to display under the ting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Name to display screen will be displayed. 9 0 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 7. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Department inform. edit ting item ID-code Name to display Value 0007 st Sales Dept. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. - - edit Touch the key. Department info. Editing ting item ID-code Name to display Value 0007 st Sales Dept. - - edit 8 Touch the AllDel. key to delete the old department name, then enter the new name. Name to display Stop st Sales Dept. Limit: letters including # AllDel. Del. prev = ` q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ a s d f g h j k l ; ' z x c v b n m,. / Capital Letter Num./Sym. Space Name to display Stop st Sales Dept. Limit: letters inc. # key AllDel. Del. prev = ` q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ ` a s d f g h j k l ; ' z x c v b n m,. / Capital Letter Symbol Symbol Space For information on how to enter the department name, refer to. Entering characters on page

158 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Change restrictions for use Perform the following procedure when you want to change the restrictions for using the copier under each department ID-code. IMPORTANT! the department ID-code for which you want to change the restrictions, and then touch the Limit in use key. The Limit in use screen will be displayed. edit In order to access the Change restrictions for use procedure under Editing copy management information, it is necessary to select under Copier function management ON/OFF. When the optional er Kit, er/scanner Kit or Fax Kit are installed in your copier, it is necessary to select under the corresponding er function management ON/OFF, Scanner function management ON/OFF or Fax function management ON/OFF procedure. (See (6) Changing the copy management settings on page 7-5.) Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use edit Access the copy management menu screen. (See () Accessing the copy management menu screen on page 7-.) Department st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Mgt. Inf. correction Delete Limit in use / Machine Language setting BOX report check User Adjustment It is possible for you to change the order of how the list of ID-codes is displayed. To so, touch the Order of indication key and then touch the Sort by code key (and select either / 9 or 9 / ) or the Sort by Name key (and select either A / Z or Z / A ), as appropriate. / Language Change the restrictions for using the copier under that department ID-code as desired. setting Hard Disk check Machine report User Adjustment Limit in use 0007 st Sales Dept. ting item Value Touch the edit key. The edit screen will be displayed. limitation er limitation Output limitation Scanner limitation Fax Transm. Limitation No limit No limit No limit - - edit Managem. Total /t. Limit in use 0007 st Sales Dept. total Each Mgt. Total edit Def.. ting item limitation er limitation Output limitation Scanner limitation Fax Transm. Limitation No limit No limit No limit Value - - edit Managem. Total total Each Mgt. Total /t. edit Def.. For information on how to change restrictions, refer to ting the restrictions for use on page

159 5 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS () Checking the copy management counts Check all departments Limit in use 0007 st Sales Dept. ting item limitation er limitation Output limitation No limit Scanner limitation No limit Fax Transm. Limitation No limit - - edit Value Perform the following procedure when you want to check the total number of copies made under all department ID-codes as a whole, print out a copy management report and clear the copy counts for all of the registered department ID-codes. Access the copy management menu screen. (See () Accessing the copy management menu screen on page 7-.) Limit in use 0007 st Sales Dept. / ting item Value limitation er limitation Output limitation Scanner limitation Fax Transm. Limitation No limit No limit No limit Machine Language setting BOX report check User Adjustment - - edit 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / 7 Touch the key. Language setting Hard Disk check Machine report User Adjustment Touch the total key. The total screen will be displayed. Managem. Total /t. total Each Mgt. Total edit Def.. Managem. Total /t. total Each Mgt. Total edit Def.. 7-

160 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS The total number of copies made under all department IDcodes as a whole will be displayed. If you want to print out a copy management report, touch the report key. 5 When the confirmation message appears, touch the Yes key. Stop Total Number print. er Fax Total Black & White: Scan.Transm. Scanner Fax Transm. Fax clear The counted number for this ID-code will be deleted Are you sure? Scan # pages: 00 Trsm. # pages: 00 Commun.Time: Hrs 0Mins report Yes No - Stop Total Number print. er Fax Total Black & White: Scan.Transm. Scanner Fax transm. Fax clear The counted number for this ID-code will be deleted Are you sure? Scan # pages: 00 Trsm. # pages: 00 Commun.Time: Hrs 0Mins report Yes No - S The type of report printed out will vary according the setting selected for /er output management under the copy management settings. If any of the Total size through Total size 5 settings is selected under the copy management settings, the total size report will also be printed out. 6 7 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. To clear all of the copy counts, touch the clear key. Total Number print. er Fax Total Black & White: Scan.Transm. Scanner Fax Transm. Fax clear Scan # pages: 00 Trsm. # pages: 00 Commun.Time: Hrs 0Mins report - Total Number print. er Fax Total Black & White: Scan.Transm. Scanner Fax transm. Fax clear Scan # pages: 00 Trsm. # pages: 00 Commun.Time: Hrs 0Mins report - 7-

161 Check individual departments Perform the following procedure when you want to check the total number of copies made under each individual department ID-code and/or clear the copy counts for individual departments as well. Access the copy management menu screen. (See () Accessing the copy management menu screen on page 7-.) / Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS the department ID-code for which you want to check the copy counts, and then touch the Total key. Each Total Department! ! st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Total Language setting BOX check Each Total Machine / report User Adjustment Department! ! st Sales Dept. nd Sales Dept. rd Sales Dept. th Sales Dept. 5th Sales Dept. 6th Sales Dept. 7th Sales Dept. 00/00 Order of indication Total Machine Language setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment Touch the Each Mgt. Total key. The Each Total screen will be displayed. Managem. Total total Each Mgt. Total /t. edit Def.. S The ---ETC displayed in the list indicates the number of printouts that were made without entering an ID-code. The printouts included under ---ETC are as follows: Report print out er error report print out out from a computer for which an ID-code is not set (When the Non-standard printer driver printout (er) is set to ON under the copy management settings.) Fax reception print out Fax report print out It is possible for you to change the order of how the list of ID-codes is displayed. To so, touch the Order of indication key and then touch the Sort by code key (and select either / 9 or 9 / ) or the Sort by Name key (and select either A / Z or Z / A ), as appropriate. Managem. Total /t. total Each Mgt. Total edit Def.. 7-

162 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS The total number of copies made under that department IDcode will be displayed. 6 When the confirmation message appears, touch the Yes key. Each Total Stop Number print. Black & White: er Total Number in( ) is limit value Scan.Transm. Scan # pages: Scanner Fax Transm. Fax 00 Trsm. # pages: 00 Commun.Time: Hrs 0Mins clear The count value of this ID-code will be deleted Are you sure? Yes No st Sales Dept. Each Total Stop Number print. Black & White: er Total Number in( ) is limit value Scan.Transm. Scan # pages: Fax transm. Scanner Fax 00 Trsm. # pages: 00 Commun.Time: Hrs 0Mins st Sales Dept. clear The count value of this ID-code will be deleted Are you sure? Yes No the Each Total screen, the number in the brackets following the number of copies made indicates the maximum number of copies that can be made. 7 8 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. 5 To clear all of the copy counts for that ID-code, touch the clear key. 9 Touch the key. Each Total Number print. Black & White: er Total Number in( ) is limit value Scan.Transm. Scanner Fax Transm. Fax clear Scan # pages: 00 Trsm. # pages: 00 Commun.Time: Hrs 0Mins st Sales Dept. Each Total Number print. Black & White: er Total Number in( ) is limit value Scan.Transm. Scanner Fax transm. Fax clear Scan # pages: 00 Trsm. # pages: 00 Commun.Time: Hrs 0Mins st Sales Dept. 7-

163 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS (5) Turning the copy management function ON/OFF Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy management ON or OFF. Access the copy management menu screen. (See () Accessing the copy management menu screen on page 7-.) / Machine Language setting / BOX report check User Adjustment (6) Changing the copy management settings Perform the following procedure when you want to change the settings for the copy management function. The following settings are available. Copier function management ON/OFF (Page 7-6.) er function management ON/OFF (Page 7-7.) er error report (Page 7-8.) Non-standard printer driver printout (er) (Page 7-9.) /er output management (Page 7-0.) Scanner function management ON/OFF (Page 7-.) Fax function management ON/OFF (Page 7-.) Response to exceeded restriction (Page 7-.) Default copy limit (Page 7-.) Total count for specified paper size ( to 5) (Page 7-5) Accessing the copy management settings Access the copy management menu screen. (See () Accessing the copy management menu screen on page 7-.) Language setting Hard Disk check / Machine report User Adjustment Language setting BOX check To turn copy management ON, touch the key. To turn copy management OFF, touch the key. Machine report User Adjustment / Managem. Total /t. Language total Each Mgt. Total edit Def.. Machine setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment Managem. Total /t. total Each Mgt. Total edit Def.. Touch the key. 7-5

164 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Touch the Def.. key. The Managem. Def.. screen will be displayed. Managem. Total total Each Mgt. Total /t. edit Def.. Copier function management ON/OFF Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy management ON or OFF for the copier functions of this machine. management under the ting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The management screen will be displayed. Managem. Def.. Managem. Total /t. ting item management. Managem. er error report Others Mgt. Reg. (print) /er output mgt. Scanner Managem. Fax All Value - - Managem. Def set. total Each Mgt. Total edit Def.. Managem. Def.. ting item Value the setting that you want to change and then touch the key. management. managem. er error report Others mgt. Reg. (print) /er output mgt. Scanner Managem. Fax All - - Managem. Def set. Managem. Def.. ting item management. Managem. er error report Others Mgt. Reg. (print) /er output mgt. Scanner Managem. Fax All Value To turn copy management ON for the copier functions of this machine, touch the key. - - Managem. Def set. management management can be set up. Managem. Def.. ting item Value management. managem. er error report Others mgt. Reg. (print) /er output mgt. Scanner Managem. Fax All - - Managem. Def set. - - Managem. Def set. management management can be set up. Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired setting. - - Managem. Def set. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. 7-6

165 er function management ON/OFF Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy management ON or OFF for the printer functions of this machine. Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS To turn copy management ON for the printer functions of this machine, touch the key.. Managem. er management can be set up. This setting is only available when the optional er Kit or er/ Scanner Kit is installed in your copier.. Managem. under the ting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The. Managem. screen will be displayed. - - Managem. Def set.. managem. er management can be set up. Managem. Def.. ting item Value management. Managem. er error report Others Mgt. Reg. (print) /er output mgt. All Scanner Managem. Fax - - Managem. Def set. - - Managem. Def set. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Managem. Def.. ting item management. managem. er error report Others mgt. Reg. (print) /er output mgt. Scanner Managem. Fax All Value Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. - - Managem. Def set. 7-7

166 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS er error report Perform the following procedure if you want an error report printed anytime is selected as the er function management ON/ OFF setting and printing is attempted with an invalid department IDcode. This setting will only be available when is selected as the er function management ON/OFF setting. To have a printer error report printed out, touch the key. If you do not want the printer error report printed out, touch the key. er error report Error report is output. at the time of Mgt. code mismatch. - - Managem. Def set. er error report under the ting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The er error report screen will be displayed. er error report Error report is output. at the time of Mgt. code mismatch. Managem. Def.. ting item Value - - Managem. Def set. management. Managem. er error report Others Mgt. Reg. (print) /er output mgt. Scanner Managem. Fax All - - Managem. Def set. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Managem. Def.. ting item management. managem. er error report Others mgt. Reg. (print) /er output mgt. Scanner Managem. Fax All Value Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. - - Managem. Def set. If anyone attempts to print using an invalid department ID-code, an error will occur under the printing functions and printout will not be possible. When the [er] key is touched, Department ID-code mismatch. will be displayed. Touch the GO key to print out an error report. Department code mismatch. line Cancel GO Department code mismatch. line Cancel GO 7-8

167 Non-standard printer driver printout (er) Perform the following procedure when is selected as the er function management ON/OFF setting and you want to want to allow the use of printer drivers other than those available under copy management. Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS To allow the use of printer drivers other than those available under copy management, touch the key. Others Mgt. Reg. (print) Output. of print. is possible for unspecif. ID-code This setting will only be available when is selected as the er function management ON/OFF setting. - - Managem. Def set. Others Mgt. Reg. (print) under the ting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Others Mgt. Reg. (print) screen will be displayed. Others mgt. Reg. (print) Output. of print. is possible for unspecif. ID-code Managem. Def.. ting item Value management. Managem. er error report Others Mgt. Reg. (print) /er output mgt. All Scanner Managem. Fax - - Managem. Def set. - - Managem. Def set. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Managem. Def.. ting item Value Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. management. managem. er error report Others mgt. Reg. (print) /er output mgt. Scanner Managem. Fax All - - Managem. Def set. 7-9

168 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS /er output management Perform the following procedure to determine whether management of copier and printer functions will be handled together or separately. If this setting is changed, it will affect which setting items are available for restriction under the copy management function. (See ting the restrictions for use on page 7-7.) To have copier and printer functions both handled together, touch the All key. To have copier and printer functions each handled separately, touch the Each key. /er output mgt. /er output management method setting. All Each /er output mgt. under the ting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The /er output mgt. screen will be displayed. - - Managem. Def set. /er output mgt. /er output management method setting. Managem. Def.. All Each ting item Value management. Managem. er error report Others Mgt. Reg. (print) /er output mgt. All Scanner Managem. Fax - - Managem. Def set. - - Managem. Def set. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Managem. Def.. ting item management. managem. er error report Others mgt. Reg. (print) /er output mgt. Scanner Managem. Fax All Value Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. - - Managem. Def set. 7-0

169 Scanner function management ON/OFF Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy management ON or OFF for the scanner functions of this machine. Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS To turn copy management ON for the scanner functions of this machine, touch the key. Scanner Managem. Scanner management can be set up. This setting is only available when the optional er/scanner Kit is installed in your copier. Scanner Managem. under the ting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Scanner Managem. screen will be displayed. - - Managem. Def set. Scanner Managem. Scanner management can be set up. Managem. Def.. ting item Value management. Managem. er error report Others Mgt. Reg. (print) /er output mgt. All Scanner Managem. Fax - - Managem. Def set. - - Managem. Def set. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Managem. Def.. ting item management. managem. er error report Others mgt. Reg. (print) /er output mgt. Scanner Managem. Fax All Value Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. - - Managem. Def set. 7-

170 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Fax function management ON/OFF Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy management ON or OFF for the fax functions of this machine. To turn copy management ON for the fax functions of this machine, touch the key. Fax Fax management can be set up. This setting is only available when the optional Fax Kit is installed in your copier. Fax under the ting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Fax screen will be displayed. - - Managem. Def set. Fax Fax management can be set up. Managem. Def.. ting item Value Scanner Managem. Fax Excess of limit ting Unable to use Def. Val. of coun. limit Total size 8 /x" No specif. Total size 8 /x" No specif. Total size 8 /x" No specif. - - Managem. Def set. - - Managem. Def set. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Managem. Def.. ting item Value Scanner Managem. Fax Excess of limit ting You cannot use Def. Val. of coun. limit Total size A No specif. Total size B No specif. Total size A No specif. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. - - Managem. Def set. 7-

171 Response to exceeded restriction Perform the following procedure to determine whether further use of the machine by the corresponding department will be discontinued immediately (starting with the current job) or with the next job, or if only an error message will be generated when a department ID-code has exceeded its set limit. If the optional er/scanner Kit or Fax Kit is installed on your copier, even if you select here to have further use of the machine discontinued immediately (starting with the current job), if a department ID-code exceeds its set limit during scanning or during fax transmission, the actual restriction will start from the next job. Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS To discontinue further use of the machine immediately (starting with the current job) when a department ID-code has exceeded its set limit, touch the Stop job immediatly key. To cancel further use of the machine starting from the next job, touch the Stop after job done key. To have an error message generated, touch the ly warning key. Excess of limit ting proper setting when limit exceeded. Stop job immediatly Stop after job done ly warning - - Managem. Def set. Excess of limit ting under the ting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Excess of limit ting screen will be displayed. Managem. Def.. Excess of limit ting proper setting when limit exceeded. Stop job immediatly Stop after job done ly warning - - Managem. Def set. ting item Value Scanner Managem. Fax Excess of limit ting Unable to use Def. Val. of coun. limit Total size 8 /x" No specif. Total size 8 /x" No specif. Total size 8 /x" No specif. - - Managem. Def set. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Managem. Def.. ting item Value Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Scanner Managem. Fax Excess of limit ting You cannot use Def. Val. of coun. limit Total size A No specif. Total size B No specif. Total size A No specif. - - Managem. Def set. 7-

172 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Default copy limit Perform the following procedure when you want to change the copy limit for new department ID-codes. Def. Val. of coun. limit under the ting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Def. Val. of coun. limit screen will be displayed. Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the copy limit. The limit can be set to any -page increment up to 999,999. Def. Val. of coun. limit Default value of counter limit can be set. (~999,999) Limited value 999,999 Clear Managem. Def.. ting item Value - - Managem. Def set. Scanner Managem. Fax Excess of limit ting Unable to use Def. Val. of coun. limit Total size 8 /x" No specif. Total size 8 /x" No specif. Total size 8 /x" No specif. Def. Val. of coun. Limit Default value of counter limit can be set. - - Managem. Def set. (~999,999) Limited value 999,999 Clear Managem. Def.. ting item Value Scanner Managem. Fax Excess of limit ting You cannot use Def. Val. of coun. limit Total size A No specif. Total size B No specif. Total size A No specif. - - Managem. Def set. - - Managem. Def set. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. 7-

173 Total count for specified paper size ( to 5) Perform the following procedure when you want to register a specific paper size in order to calculate and check the copy counts for that particular size of paper. It is also possible to register a paper size AND type. Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Touch the key. Total size Can set totals of paper size and type. S You can register up to 5 different paper sizes for this function. If the type of paper is not registered in any of the settings, the corresponding copy counts for that size of paper will be calculated regardless of the type of paper that is used. However, if the same size of paper is registered in another setting along with a paper type, the counts for the first setting will NOT include copies made with the type of paper that is registered in the second setting. - - Managem. Def set. Total size Can set totals of paper size and type. one of the Total size through Total size 5 settings under the ting item column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The corresponding setting screen will be displayed. Managem. Def Managem. Def set. Touch the size key. Total size ting item Value Scanner Managem. Fax Excess of limit ting Unable to use Def. Val. of coun. limit Total size 8 /x" No specif. Total size 8 /x" No specif. Total size 8 /x" No specif. Can set totals of paper size and type. 8 /x" size Paper type With no specif. paper type - - Managem. Def set. Managem. Def Managem. Def set. Total size ting item Value Scanner Managem. Fax Excess of limit ting You cannot use Def. Val. of coun. limit Total size A No specif. Total size B No specif. Total size A No specif. Can set totals of paper size and type. A size Paper type With no specif. paper type - - Managem. Def set. - - Managem. Def set. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. 7-5

174 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Touch the key that corresponds to the desired paper size, and then touch the key. 6 Touch the key that corresponds to the desired paper type, and then touch the key. size paper type A A B B5 x7" 8 /x" With no specif. Transparency Labels Recycled Cardstock Color Thick paper Envelope Custom Custom Custom 5 Custom 6 A5 Folio 8 /x" Rough Preprinted Prepunched Custom Custom 7 5 /x8 /" Vellum Bond Letterhead High quality Custom Custom 8 - Managem. Def set. - Total size - Managem. Def set. - Total size size paper type A A B B5 x7" 8 /x" With no specif. Transparency Labels Recycled Cardstock Colour Thick paper Envelope Custom Custom Custom 5 Custom 6 A5 Folio 8 /x" 5 /x8 /" Rough Vellum Preprinted Bond Prepunched Letterhead High quality Custom Custom Custom 7 Custom 8 - Managem. Def set. - Total size - Managem. Def set. - Total size 5 To specify a paper type as well, touch the paper type key and proceed to the next step. If you do not want to specify a paper type, proceed to step 7. Total size Can set totals of paper size and type. 8 /x" size Paper type With no specif. paper type 7 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. You can check the copy counts for the paper sizes registered under the Total size through Total size 5 settings on the total size report that is printed together with the copy management report. For information on how to print out a copy management report, refer to Check all departments on page Managem. Def set. Total size Can set totals of paper size and type. Paper type A size With no specif. paper type - - Managem. Def set. 7-6

175 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS (7) Making copies when copy management is turned ON When copy management is turned ON, copying will only be possible when a valid department ID-code is entered. IMPORTANT! S If you enter the wrong ID-code, touch the clear key and reenter the correct ID-code. If an invalid (unregistered) department ID-code is entered, an error alarm will sound. Enter the correct ID-code. If you enter your department ID-code and touch the Each Mgt. Total key, you can check the copy counts for your own department. ce you are finished copying, BE SURE to press the [] key so that the Enter ID-code screen is displayed again. Each Total Number print. Black & White: er Total Number in( ) is limit value Scan.Transm. Scan # pages: Scanner Fax Transm. Fax 00 Trsm. # pages: 00 Commun.Time: Hrs 0Mins - st Sales Dept. Each Total Number print. Black & White: er Total Number in( ) is limit value Scan.Transm. Scan # pages: Scanner Fax transm. Fax 00 Trsm. # pages: 00 Commun.Time: Hrs 0Mins Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter your department ID-code, and then touch the Enter key. The Basic screen will be displayed. - st Sales Dept. Perform the desired copy operation as usual. Enter ID-code. Each Mgt. Total ce you are finished copying, press the [] key. **** Clear Enter Enter ID-code. **** Each Mgt. Total Clear Enter 7-7

176 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS. s The state that the copier enters at the end of warm-up or when the [Reset] key is pressed is called the initial mode. The modes, functions and other settings that are automatically pre-set for the initial mode are called settings. These settings are separated into two categories: s and Machine s and can be changed as desired to suit your copying needs. () Machine settings The following table indicates the machine settings available in this copier. Change any or all of the settings as desired in order to make the most effective use of your copier. Description Available settings Factory setting Reference page drawer[cassette] switching ON/OFF If the paper in one drawer[cassette] runs out during copying, the automatic drawer[cassette] switching function will switch paper feed from the empty drawer[cassette] to another drawer[cassette] that contains the same size of paper in the same orientation for uninterrupted copying. To enable this function, it is necessary to turn the related setting. / 7- In order to prevent a drawer[cassette] that holds a different type of paper from being switched to when the automatic drawer[cassette] switching function is turned ON, it is necessary to select Feed same paper type as well. All types of paper / Feed same paper type All types of paper (drawer[cassette] No. No.) s the size of paper that is loaded in drawers[cassettes] No. through No.. If you want the size to be detected automatically, select Detection (matic size detection). If you want to manually set the size of paper, select Standard sizes. Detection / Standard sizes Detection 7- <If you select Detection > You can also select the desired unit of measurement: Inch or Centimeter. Inch Centimeter Inch specification: Inch Metric specification: Centimeter <If you select Standard sizes > You can then select the paper size. * The setting for drawer[cassette] No. and No. will only be available when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier. A A AR A5R B B5 B5R Folio x 7 8 / x x 8 / 8 / x 5 / x 8 / 8 / x 8K 6K 7-8

177 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Description Available settings Factory setting Reference page Paper type (drawer[cassette] No. - No. ) s and then displays the type of paper that is loaded in drawers[cassettes] No. through No.. * The setting for drawer[cassette] No. and No. will only be available when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier. Preprinted Recycled Letterhead Color [Colour] Prepunched Rough Bond High quality Vellum Custom Custom 8 7- Multi-bypass tray settings display ON/OFF Turn this setting ON if you want the setting screen to be displayed whenever the key is touched in the Basic tab. / 7-5 Custom paper type for -sided copying s whether or not each custom paper type (custom custom 8) will be available for use in -sided copying. / 7-6 Special paper action setting - When copying onto prepunched, preprinted or letterhead paper, and performing both -sided copying and -sided copying from the same drawer[cassette], the positioning of the holes in relation to the copied image may be different for each copy or the front and rear images of - sided copies may be copied onto the opposites sides of the paper. If you select Adj. print Direction, both -sided and -sided copies will be created with the same orientation. Example: the paper as shown in the illustration Adj. print Direction / Speed Priority Speed Priority 7-6- Drawer[Cassette] ting -sided copying -sided copying Adj. print Direction Speed Priority * When Adj. print Direction is selected, the speed of - sided copying will be somewhat slower than normal. * When making copies with Adj. print Direction selected, set the paper as shown in illustration A and with the first image being copied set face-down. (If the optional Built-in Finisher is installed on your copier, set the paper as shown in illustration B and with the first image being copied set face-down.) * If the optional Finisher or Built-in Finisher is installed on your copier and you have selected either the Staple mode or the Hole Punch mode, the direction that the copy image is created in may not conform to the desired position of the staples or holes. 7-9

178 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Description Available settings Factory setting Reference page Original set direction Designates the setting for the original set direction. Rear [ Edge] / Left top corner Rear [ Edge] 7-6- sleep time s the amount of time that will elapse before the auto sleep function engages. * It is recommended that you try to set a longer time interval before the auto sleep function engages if you use the copier frequently, and to a shorter time if there are long intervals between use. *For more detailed information on the auto sleep function, see page -., 5, 5, 0, 5, 60, 90, 0, 80, 0 (minutes) 60 (minutes) 7-7 low power time s the amount of time that will elapse before the Low Power mode is automatically activated if no operation is performed on the copier during that time. *For more detailed information on the Low power mode, see page -., 5, 5, 0, 5, 60, 90, 0, 80, 0 (minutes) 5 (minutes) 7-8 eject location s the location for the ejection of finished copies. * This setting will only be displayed when the optional Finisher, Built-in Finisher or Job Separator is installed on your copier. * The available location for ejection will differ depending upon the optional equipment that is installed on your copier. Inner tray Job separator Finisher tray Finisher main tray Finisher sub tray Inner tray 7-9 Fax eject location s the location for the ejection of received faxes. * This setting will only be displayed when the optional Fax Kit and Finisher (or the Built-in Finisher or Job Separator) are installed on your copier. * The available location for ejection will differ depending upon the optional equipment that is installed on your copier. Inner tray Job separator Finisher tray Finisher main tray Finisher sub tray Mailbox Inner tray 7-50 Default operation mode s which operation mode, the copy operation mode or the fax operation mode, will be selected when the power is turned on to the copier. mode FAX mode mode

179 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Description Available settings Factory setting Reference page Touch panel sound ON/ OFF s whether or not the touch panel will emit a beep sound each time a key is touched. / 7-5 Silent mode ON/OFF The copier can be switched to a silent mode, which shortens the length of time that the laser data writing motor continues to spin after each copy job is finished. Turn the silent mode ON if the noise of the motor bothers you in any way. / 7-5 Day & time s the current date and time. Year: Month: Day: Time: 00:00 :59 Year: 00 Month: 0 Day: 0 Time: 00: Time difference s the time difference from the world standard time (GMT). +:00 -:00 00: Changing the management code Changes the management code that is used by the copy manager. IMPORTANT: If you change the management code from its factory, be sure to keep some sort of record of the new management code. If, for any reason, you forget the registered management code, you will need to contact your service representative cpm copiers: cpm copiers: cpm copiers: sleep ON/OFF s whether or not the auto sleep function will engage automatically. * If auto sleep interferes with your copying operations, turn this function OFF. However, it is recommended that you try to set a longer time interval until auto sleep engages before you actually turn it OFF. * For more detailed information on turn the auto sleep function, see page -. /

180 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Description Available settings Factory setting Reference page Changing the energysaving mode Changes the energy-saving mode that will be entered into when the [Energy Saver] key is pressed. (See 5. Energy-saving modes on page - for more information.) * This setting is displayed when the optional er Kit or er/scanner Kit is installed. If you are using a standard copier, or if the optional Fax Kit is installed in your copier, you can press the [Energy Saver] key to engage the Low power mode. Low power mode Sleep mode Low power mode

181 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS () Accessing the machine settings Perform the following procedure when you want to access the screens for each of the various machine settings. Use the keypad to enter the -digit management code. The factory setting for 0 cpm copiers is 000, for 0 cpm copiers is 000 and for 50 cpm copiers is With the content of the Basic tab displayed, press the [Default ting/] key. The screen will be displayed. Enter the administrator number Enter the administrator number Touch the Machine key on the left side of the touch panel. If the entered code matched the registered one, the Machine screen will be displayed. / / Machine Machine Language setting BOX report check User Adjustment Default menu drawer switching (st drawer) (nd drawer) (rd drawer) (th drawer) ting mode / All types of paper / Inch / Inch / Inch / Inch / / Machine Machine Language setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment Default menu cassette switching (st cassette) (nd cassette) (rd cassette) (th cassette) ting mode / All types of paper / Centimeter / Centimeter / Centimeter / Centimeter S It is possible for you to change the -digit management code. (See Changing the management code on page 7-56.) Refer to the desired procedure(s) explained under () Making machine settings and perform the corresponding setting(s). 7-

182 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS () Making machine settings Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired setting. drawer[cassette] switching ON/OFF Perform the following procedure to turn automatic drawer[cassette] switching ON or OFF, as desired. Display the Machine screen. (See () Accessing the machine settings on page 7-.) / Touch the key to automatic drawer[cassette] switching ON. drawer switching When paper drawer is empty, switch to another one, set same size/direction paper, and continue copying. Function Paper type - Machine All types of paper Feed same paper type cassette switching When paper cassette is empty, switch to another one, set same size/direction paper, and continue copying. Function Paper type Language setting BOX check All types of Paper Feed same paper type Machine report User Adjustment - Machine / In order to prevent a drawer[cassette] that holds a different type of paper from being switched to when the automatic drawer[cassette] switching function is turned ON, touch the Feed same paper type key under Paper type. Language setting Hard Disk check Machine report User Adjustment If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. drawer switching [ cassette switching ] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key.the drawer switching [ cassette switching ] screen will be displayed. / 5 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Machine Default menu drawer switching (st drawer) (nd drawer) (rd drawer) (th drawer) ting mode / All types of paper / Inch / Inch / Inch / Inch 7 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Machine Default menu cassette switching (st cassette) (nd cassette) (rd cassette) (th cassette) ting mode / All types of paper / Centimeter / Centimeter / Centimeter / Centimeter 7-

183 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS (drawer[cassette] No. No.) Perform the following procedure to set the size of paper that is loaded in drawer[cassette] No. through No.. Display the Machine screen. (See () Accessing the machine settings on page 7-.) If you select Detection (automatic size detection) here, select the desired unit of measure ( Centimeter or Inch ) as well. If you select Standard sizes (standard paper size) here, simply touch the key that corresponds to the size of paper that is loaded in that drawer[cassette]. Paper type(st drawer) paper size. / A B x7" 5 /x8 /" Machine Language setting BOX report check User Adjustment Detection Standard sizes A A A5 - Machine B5 B5 Folio 8 /x" x8 /" 8 /x" 8 /x" 8K 6K (st cassette) / paper size. Language setting Hard Disk check Detection Standard sizes A A A A5 B B5 B5 Folio x7" 8 /x" x8 /" 8 /x" 5 /x8 /" 8 /x" 8K 6K Machine report User Adjustment - Machine one of the settings ( st drawer[cassette] through th drawer[cassette] ) in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The screen to set the paper size for that drawer[cassette] will be displayed. S If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. The setting for drawer[cassette] No. and No. will only be available when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier. / Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Machine Default menu drawer switching (st drawer) (nd drawer) (rd drawer) (th drawer) ting mode / All types of paper / Inch / Inch / Inch / Inch 5 6 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Machine Default menu cassette switching (st cassette) (nd cassette) (rd cassette) (th cassette) ting mode / All types of paper / Centimeter / Centimeter / Centimeter / Centimeter 7-

184 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Paper type (drawer[cassette] No. - No. ) Perform the following procedure to set the type of paper that is loaded in drawers[cassettes] No. through No.. Touch the key that corresponds to the type of paper that is loaded in that drawer[cassette]. Display the Machine screen. (See () Accessing the machine settings on page 7-.) Paper type(st drawer) and display paper type. Preprinted Color Prepunched High quality Vellum Custom Custom Custom 5 Custom 6 Recycled Rough Custom Custom 7 / Letterhead - Machine Bond Custom Custom 8 Language Machine setting BOX report check User Adjustment Paper type (st cassette) and display paper type. Colour High quality Custom Custom 5 Preprinted Prepunched Vellum Custom Custom 6 Recycled Letterhead Rough Bond Custom Custom Custom 7 Custom 8 / - Machine Machine Language setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment S If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. The setting for drawer[cassette] No. and No. will only be available when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier. one of the Paper type settings ( st drawer[cassette] through th drawer[cassette] ) in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The screen to set the paper type for that drawer[cassette] will be displayed. 5 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. / Machine Default menu Paper type (st drawer) Paper type (nd drawer) Paper type (rd drawer) Paper type (th drawer) Check bypass sizing ting mode 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Machine Default menu Paper type (st cassette) Paper type (nd cassette) Paper type (rd cassette) Paper type (th cassette) Check bypass sizing ting mode 7-

185 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Multi-bypass tray settings display ON/OFF Perform the following procedure to have the setting screen appear whenever the key is pressed in the Basic tab. Touch the key if you want to have the setting screen appear. Display the Machine screen. (See () Accessing the machine settings on page 7-.) Check bypass sizing Display and check bypass setting mode when selecting. "" when using custom size or changing paper type. / - Machine Language Machine setting BOX report check User Adjustment Check bypass sizing Display and check bypass setting mode when selecting. "" when using custom size or changing paper type. / - Machine Machine Language setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Check bypass sizing in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Check bypass sizing screen will be displayed. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / 5 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Machine Default menu Paper type (st drawer) Paper type (nd drawer) Paper type (rd drawer) Paper type (th drawer) Check bypass sizing ting mode 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Machine Default menu Paper type (st cassette) Paper type (nd cassette) Paper type (rd cassette) Paper type (th cassette) Check bypass sizing ting mode 7-5

186 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Custom paper type for -sided copying Perform the following procedure to set whether or not each custom type of paper (custom - custom 8) will be available for use in -sided copying. Display the Machine screen. (See () Accessing the machine settings on page 7-.) / one of the custom paper type settings ( Custom through Custom 8 ) under the Default menu column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. paper type(sided) paper type(s) for duplex copy. Default menu Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom 5 Custom 6 Custom 7 ting mode - Machine Language setting BOX check Machine report User Adjustment paper type(sided) paper type(s) for duplex copy. / Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom 5 Custom 6 Custom 7 Default menu ting mode - Machine Machine Language setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment Touch the key if you do NOT want that custom paper type to be available for use in -sided copying. Custom paper type (sided) in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The paper type (sided) screen will be displayed. / - Machine - paper type (sided) Machine Custom Default menu Paper type (nd drawer) Paper type (rd drawer) Paper type (th drawer) Check bypass sizing paper type (sided) ting mode - Machine - paper type (sided) / Machine Default menu Paper type (nd cassette) Paper type (rd cassette) Paper type (th cassette) Check bypass sizing paper type (sided) ting mode If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. 7-6

187 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Special paper action setting When copying onto prepunched, preprinted or letterhead paper, and performing both -sided copying and -sided copying from the same drawer[cassette], the positioning of the holes in relation to the copied image may be different for each copy or the front and rear images of -sided copies may be copied onto the opposites sides of the paper. If you select Adj. print Direction, both -sided and -sided copies will be created with the same orientation. Adj. print Direction. Special paper action mode Possible to set action of the paper (Prepunched, Preprinted, Letterhead) Adj. print Direction Speed Priority Display the Machine screen. (See () Accessing the machine settings on page 7-.) - Machine / Language Specif. paper action mode Possible to set action of the paper (Prepunched, Preprinted, Letterhead) Adj. print Direction Speed Priority Machine setting BOX report check User Adjustment - Machine / Language S When Adj. print Direction is selected, the speed of -sided copying will be somewhat slower than normal. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. setting Hard Disk check Machine report User Adjustment Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Special paper action mode [ Specif. paper action mode ] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Special paper action mode [ Specif. paper action mode ] screen will be displayed. 5 6 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Machine Default menu Paper type (rd drawer) Paper type (th drawer) Check bypass sizing paper type (sided) Special paper action mode ting mode Speed priority / Machine Default menu Paper type (rd cassette) Paper type (th cassette) Check bypass sizing paper type (sided) Specif. paper action mode ting mode Speed priority 7-6-

188 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Original set direction Perform the following procedure to designate the setting for the original set direction. either Rear [ Edge ] or Left top corner. Orig. set direction Display the Machine screen. (See () Accessing the machine settings on page 7-.) mode for Original set direction. Rear or Left top corner. Rear Left top corner / - Machine Language Orig. set direction Machine setting BOX report check User Adjustment mode for Original set direction. Edge or Left top corner. Edge Left top corner / - Machine Machine Language setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Orig. set direction in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Orig. set direction screen will be displayed. / 5 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Machine Default menu Paper type (th drawer) Check bypass sizing paper type (sided) Special paper action mode Orig. set direction ting mode Speed priority Rear 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Machine Default menu Paper type (th cassette) Check bypass sizing paper type (sided) Specif. paper action mode Orig. set direction ting mode Speed priority Edge 7-6-

189 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS sleep time Perform the following procedure to set the amount of time that will elapse before the auto sleep function engages. Touch the + key or the key to change the displayed time to the desired setting (between minutes and 0 minutes). Display the Machine screen. (See () Accessing the machine settings on page 7-.) Sleep mode changing time Changing time to turn automatically into sleep mode after last setting,or when copying is done. + Minute / - Machine Language Machine setting BOX report check User Adjustment Sleep mode changing time Changing time to turn automatically into sleep mode after last setting,or when copying is done. Minute / - Machine Language Machine setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment Sleep mode changing time in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Sleep mode changing time screen will be displayed. S The setting can be made to minute, 5 minutes, 5 minutes, 0 minutes, 5 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 0 minutes, 80 minutes or 0 minutes. It is recommended that you try to set a longer time interval before the auto sleep function engages if you use the copier frequently, and to a shorter time if there are long intervals between use. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / Machine Default menu Sleep mode changing time Low power mode chng. time output mode FAX output mode the main mode ting mode 60 Minute 5 Minute Inner tray Inner tray mode 5 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. / 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. Machine Default menu Sleep mode changing time Low power mode chng. time COPY output mode FAX output mode main mode ting mode 60 Minute 5 Minute Inner tray Inner tray COPY Mode 7-7

190 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS low power time Perform the following procedure to set the amount of time that will elapse before the auto low power function automatically engages and puts the copier in the Low power mode if no operation has been performed on the copier during that time. Display the Machine screen. (See () Accessing the machine settings on page 7-.) / Touch the + key or the key to change the displayed time to that desired (any available setting between minute and 0 minutes). Low power mode chng. time Changing time to turn autom. into low power mode after last setting,or when copying is done. - Machine + Minute Language Low power mode chng. time setting BOX check Changing time to turn autom. into low power mode after last setting,or when copying is done. Machine report User Adjustment Minute / - Machine Machine Language setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment Low power mode chng. time in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The preheat time screen will be displayed. S The setting can be made to minute, 5 minutes, 5 minutes, 0 minutes, 5 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 0 minutes, 80 minutes or 0 minutes. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / Machine Sleep mode changing time Low power mode chng. time output mode FAX output mode the main mode Default menu 60 Minute 5 Minute Inner tray Inner tray mode ting mode 5 6 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Machine Default menu Sleep mode changing time Low power mode chng. time COPY output mode FAX output mode main mode 60 Minute 5 Minute Inner tray Inner tray COPY Mode ting mode 7-8

191 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS eject location Perform the following procedure to set where finished copies will be ejected. This setting will only be displayed when the optional Finisher, Built-in Finisher or Job Separator is installed on your copier. Touch the key that corresponds to the desired location. output mode the copy output destination Job separator Inner tray Finisher main tray Finisher sub tray - Machine Display the Machine screen. (See () Accessing the machine settings on page 7-.) COPY output mode the copy output destination. Job separator / Inner tray Finisher main tray Finisher sub tray Language - Machine setting BOX check Machine report User Adjustment S / The available location for ejection will differ depending upon the optional equipment that is installed on your copier. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Language Machine setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. output mode in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The output mode screen will be displayed. 5 6 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Machine Default menu Sleep mode changing time Low power mode chng. time output mode FAX output mode the main mode 60 Minute 5 Minute Inner tray Inner tray mode ting mode / Machine Default menu Sleep mode changing time Low power mode chng. time COPY output mode FAX output mode main mode 60 Minute 5 Minute Inner tray Inner tray COPY Mode ting mode 7-9

192 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Fax eject location Perform the following procedure to set where incoming faxes will be ejected. This setting will only be displayed when the optional Fax Kit and Finisher (or the Built-in Finisher or Job Separator) are installed on your copier. Touch the key that corresponds to the desired location. FAX output mode the fax output destination Job separator Inner tray Finisher sub tray - Machine MailBox Display the Machine screen. (See () Accessing the machine settings on page 7-.) FAX output mode the fax output destination. Job separator Inner tray Mailbox / Finisher sub tray Language - Machine Machine setting / BOX report check User Adjustment S The available location for ejection will differ depending upon the optional equipment that is installed on your copier. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Machine Language setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. FAX output mode in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The FAX output mode screen will be displayed. 5 6 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Machine Default menu Sleep mode changing time Low power mode chng. time output mode FAX output mode the main mode 60 Minute 5 Minute Inner tray Inner tray mode ting mode / Machine Default menu Sleep mode changing time Low power mode chng. time COPY output mode FAX output mode main mode 60 Minute 5 Minute Inner tray Inner tray COPY Mode ting mode 7-50

193 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Default operation mode Perform the following procedure to set whether the display that appears after power is turned on to the copier will be the one for the copy operation mode or for the fax operation mode. This setting is only available when the optional Fax Kit is installed in your copier. the " mode" key or the "FAX mode" key, as appropriate. the main mode the display panel mode when the power is on. mode FAX mode - Machine Display the Machine screen. (See () Accessing the machine settings on page 7-.) / main mode the display panel mode when the power is on. COPY Mode FAX mode Language - Machine setting BOX check Machine report User Adjustment If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / Language setting Hard Disk check Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Machine report User Adjustment the main mode [ main mode ] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The the main mode [ main mode ] screen will be displayed. 5 6 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Machine Default menu Sleep mode changing time Low power mode chng. time output mode FAX output mode the main mode 60 Minute 5 Minute Inner tray Inner tray mode ting mode / Machine Default menu Sleep mode changing time Low power mode chng. time COPY output mode FAX output mode main mode 60 Minute 5 Minute Inner tray Inner tray COPY Mode ting mode 7-5

194 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Touch panel sound ON/OFF Perform the following procedure to set whether or not the touch panel will emit a beep sound each time a key is touched. if you want to turn the sound OFF. Touch the key or the key to turn the sound on the touch panel ON or OFF, as desired. Key sound ON/OFF Display the Machine screen. (See () Accessing the machine settings on page 7-.) panel key sound mode off/on. / - Machine Language Key sound ON/OFF setting BOX check panel key sound mode off/on. Machine report User Adjustment / - Machine Machine Language setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Key sound ON/OFF in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Key sound ON/OFF screen will be displayed. / 5 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Machine Default menu Key sound ON/OFF Silent mode Date/Time Time difference code change ting mode 00/0/0 :0 GMT+08: Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Machine Default menu Key sound ON/OFF Silent mode Date/Time Time difference Change MGMT code with # ting mode 0/0/'0 :0 GMT+08:

195 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Silent mode ON/OFF Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to use the silent mode which shortens the length of time that the laser data writing motor continues to spin after each copy job is finished. Turn the silent mode ON if the noise of the motor bothers you in any way. Touch the key if you want to use the silent mode. Silent mode Use this mode if you are distracted by moter sounds. Display the Machine screen. (See () Accessing the machine settings on page 7-.) - Machine / Silent mode Language Shorten laser motor rotating time for before/after copying Use this mode if you are distracted by motor sound. setting BOX check Machine report User Adjustment - Machine / Language setting Hard Disk check If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Machine report User Adjustment Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Silent mode in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Silent mode screen will be displayed. 5 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. / Machine 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. Default menu Key sound ON/OFF Silent mode Date/Time Time difference code change ting mode 00/0/0 :0 GMT+08: / Machine Default menu Key sound ON/OFF Silent mode Date/Time Time difference Change MGMT code with # ting mode 0/0/'0 :0 GMT+08:

196 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Day & time Perform the following procedure to set the current date and time. BE SURE to perform the Time difference setting prior to setting the day and time. Touch the + key or the key to change the displayed information for each field ( Year, Month, Day and Time ) to the current time and date. If you want the time to be automatically calculated for daylight savings time, touch the key under Summertime. Date/Time Display the Machine screen. (See () Accessing the machine settings on page 7-.) Year 00 Month 0 Day 6 Time 8:7 - Machine Summertime / Language Date/Time Machine setting BOX report check User Adjustment Year Month 00 0 Summertime Day 6 / Time 8:7 - Machine Machine Language setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Date/Time in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Date/Time screen will be displayed. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / 5 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Machine Default menu Key sound ON/OFF Silent mode Date/Time Time difference code change ting mode 00/0/0 :0 GMT+08: Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Machine Default menu Key sound ON/OFF Silent mode Date/Time Time difference Change MGMT code with # ting mode 0/0/'0 :0 GMT+08:

197 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Time difference Perform the following procedure to set a designated time difference from the world standard time (GMT). Touch the + key or the key to change the displayed time difference to the desired setting. Display the Machine screen. (See () Accessing the machine settings on page 7-.) Time difference GMT+ 00 : 00 / - Machine Language setting BOX check Time difference Machine report User Adjustment GMT+ 00 : 00 / - Machine Machine Language setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Time difference in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Time difference screen will be displayed. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / 5 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Machine Default menu Key sound ON/OFF Silent mode Date/Time Time difference code change ting mode 00/0/0 :0 GMT+08: Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Machine Default menu Key sound ON/OFF Silent mode Date/Time Time difference Change MGMT code with # ting mode 0/0/'0 :0 GMT+08:

198 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Changing the management code Perform the following procedure to change the management code used by the copy manager. Use the keypad to enter a new -digit management code. code change Able to change management code.(# key) IMPORTANT! If you change the management code from its factory, be sure to keep some sort of record of the new management code. If, for any reason, you forget the registered management code, you will need to contact your service representative. - Machine Change MGMT code with # Display the Machine screen. (See () Accessing the machine settings on page 7-.) Able to change management code.(# key) / - Machine Language Machine setting BOX report check User Adjustment If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Language setting Hard Disk check 5 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Machine report User Adjustment 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. code change [ Change MGMT code with # ] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The code change [ Change MGMT code with # ] screen will be displayed. / Machine Default menu Key sound ON/OFF Silent mode Date/Time Time difference code change ting mode 00/0/0 :0 GMT+08: / Machine Default menu Key sound ON/OFF Silent mode Date/Time Time difference code change ting mode 00/0/0 :0 GMT+08:

199 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS sleep ON/OFF Perform the following procedure to set whether or not the auto sleep function will engage automatically. Display the Machine screen. (See () Accessing the machine settings on page 7-.) Touch the key if you want to use the auto sleep function. sleep m. turns into sleep mode if no oper. within a set time after last setting,or when copying is done. / - Machine Language sleep setting BOX check m. turns into sleep mode if no oper. within a set time after last setting,or when copying is done. Machine report User Adjustment / - Machine Machine Language setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment sleep in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The sleep screen will be displayed. S If auto sleep interferes with your copying operations, turn this function OFF. However, it is recommended that you try to set a longer time interval until auto sleep engages before you actually turn it OFF. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / Machine Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Default menu Date/Time Time difference code change sleep Energy Saver key setting ting mode 00/0/0 :0 GMT+08: Low power mode 5 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. / 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. Machine Default menu Date/Time Time difference Change MGMT code with # sleep Energy Saver key setting ting mode 0/0/'0 :0 GMT+08: Low power mode 7-57

200 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Changing the energy-saving mode Perform the following procedure to change the energy-saving mode (the Low power mode or the Sleep mode) that will be entered into when the [Energy Saver] key is pressed. Display the Machine screen. (See () Accessing the machine settings on page 7-.) / Touch the Low power mode key or the Sleep mode key, as desired. Energy Saver key setting When pressing Energy Saver key, state can be set. Low power mode Sleep mode - Machine Language Energy Saver key setting setting BOX check When pressing Energy Saver key, state can be set. Machine report User Adjustment Low power mode Sleep mode / - Machine Machine Language setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Energy Saver key setting in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Energy Saver key setting screen will be displayed. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / 5 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Machine Default menu Date/Time Time difference code change sleep Energy Saver key setting ting mode 00/0/0 :0 GMT+08: Low power mode 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Machine Default menu Date/Time Time difference Change MGMT code with # sleep Energy Saver key setting ting mode 0/0/'0 :0 GMT+08: Low power mode 7-58

201 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS () settings The following table indicates the copy settings available in this copier. Change any or all of the settings as desired in order to make the most effective use of your copier. Description Available settings Factory setting Reference page Exposure mode s between auto exposure and manual exposure as the copy exposure mode in the initial mode. Manual / Manual 7-6 Exposure adjustment step Changes the incremental step to be used during adjustment of the copy exposure. step / 0.5 step step 7-6 Original quality Determines the setting that will be used for the image quality in the initial mode. Text+Photo / Text / Photo Text+Photo 7-65 Eco print mode ON/OFF Determines whether the Eco print mode will be the setting in the initial mode. In this case, the amount of toner that is used to make the copies will be reduced, and images will be printed out relatively lighter than normal. / 7-66 ground exposure adjustment Adjusts the ground color of the copied paper. - + Standard setting (0) 7-67 Paper selection s whether the copier will automatically select the same size of copy paper as the original once an original is set (APS: auto paper selection mode), or whether the drawer[cassette] selected Default drawer [ Default cassette ] setting will be automatically selected. APS / Default drawer[cassette] APS 7-68 Paper type (auto paper selection mode) s which types of paper can be selected under the auto paper selection mode. * It is possible to select the type of paper that has been designated for the drawer[cassette] currently in use. / Preprinted Recycled Letterhead Color [Colour] Prepunched Rough Bond High quality Vellum Custom Custom Default drawer[cassette] s one drawer[cassette] that will be selected automatically regardless of the size of paper loaded in that drawer[cassette]. * It is NOT possible to select the multi-bypass tray as the drawer[cassette]. * The setting for drawer[cassette] No. and No. will only be available when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier. st paper nd paper rd paper th paper st paper

202 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Description Available settings Factory setting Reference page Cover drawer[cassette] s which drawer[cassette] will be used to feed the cover sheets in the cover mode, the booklet/stitching mode and the book to booklet mode. * The setting for drawer[cassette] No. and No. will only be available when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier. st paper nd paper rd paper th paper 7-7 Default magnification ratio s whether or not the auto magnification selection mode will be used to automatically calculate the appropriate magnification ratio when you select the size of copy paper. Manual / AMS Manual 7-7 exposure adjustment Adjusts the overall exposure level for the auto exposure mode. - + Standard setting (0) 7-7 exposure adjustment (OCR) Adjusts the overall exposure level for scanning with OCR (Optical Character Recognition) software when using the optional scanner functions of this copier. - + Standard setting (0) 7-7 Manual exposure adjustment (text+photo mode) Adjusts the median exposure value when the text+photo mode is selected for the image quality. - + Standard setting (0) 7-75 Manual exposure adjustment (text mode) Adjusts the median exposure value when the text mode is selected for the image quality. - + Standard setting (0) 7-76 Manual exposure adjustment (photo mode) Adjusts the median exposure value when the photo mode is selected for the image quality. - + Standard setting (0) 7-77 Sort/Finished mode ON/ OFF Determines whether or not the Sort and/or the Finished modes will be the setting in the initial mode. Sort mode : / Finished mode : / [ set (Output each page) ] Sort mode : Finished mode : 7-78 Rotation mode Determines whether or not the Rotation mode will be the setting in the initial mode. If Rotation is turned ON, the image will be automatically rotated even if the orientation of the original is different from that of the paper loaded in the drawers[cassettes]. Rotate / No Rotate Rotate 7-79 Margin width Determines the value of the location and width of the margins in the margin mode. Inch specification 0 / (inches) Metric specification 0 8 (mm) Inch specification Left: / (inches) Top: 0 (inches) Metric specification Left: 6 (mm) Top: 0 (mm)

203 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Description Available settings Factory setting Reference page Erased border width Determines the value for the width of the border to be erased in the two border erase modes. Inch specification Outside border: 0 / (inches) Center area: 0 / (inches) Inch specification Outside border: / (inches) Center area: / (inches) 7-8 Metric specification Outside border: 0 8 (mm) Center area: 0 6 (mm) Metric specification Outside border: 6 (mm) Center area: (mm) limit s the limit for the number of copies (or copy sets) that can be made at a time Repeat copying ON/ OFF s whether or not to prohibit repeat copying, as well as whether or not to make repeat copying the setting in the initial mode. s whether to turn the repeat copy mode ON or OFF. / 7-8 s whether or not to make repeat copying the setting in the initial mode. / * This setting is displayed when the optional Hard Disk is installed. Registration keys ON/ OFF s whether or not to allow a key to be displayed in the screen for those function and modes which can be registered under the registration keys. Functions and/or modes can only be registered under registration keys through the key. / 7-8 Customize screen layout (Main functions) Changes the order of the main functions and modes that are displayed in the Basic and the User choice tabs in order to make the display more appropriate to the way you use the copier. * to 6 functions and modes can be listed and displayed. Exposure Mode / Reduce/Enlarge / Sort/Finished / / sided / Original size / Orig. quality [Quality orig.] Exposure Mode Reduce/ Enlarge Sort/Finished / sided 5 Original size 6 Orig. quality [Quality orig.] 7-85 Customize screen layout (Add functions) Adds often-used functions and/or modes, and changes the order of their layout, in order to make the display more appropriate to the way you use the copier. All functions and modes other than those in the Basic tab and the main functions in the User choice tab. 7 Margin 8 Border Erase [Erase Mode] 9 Combine [Merge] 0 (None) (None) (None) (None)

204 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS (5) Accessing the copy settings Perform the following procedure when you want to access the screens for each of the various copy settings. Use the keypad to enter the -digit management code. The factory setting for 0 cpm copiers is 000, for 0 cpm copiers is 000 and for 50 cpm copiers is With the content of the Basic tab displayed, press the [Default ting/] key. The screen will be displayed. Enter the administrator number Enter the administrator number Touch the key on the left side of the touch panel. If the entered code matched the registered one, the screen will be displayed. / / Language Machine setting BOX report check User Adjustment Default menu Exposure mode Exposure steps Original image quality Eco ground exp. adj. Manual step Text + Photo Standard ting mode / / Language Machine setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment Default menu Exposure mode Exposure steps Image quality original Eco ground exp. adj. Manual step Text + Photo Standard ting mode S It is possible for you to change the -digit management code. (See Changing the management code on page 7-56.) Refer to the desired procedure(s) explained under (6) Making copy settings and perform the corresponding setting(s). 7-6

205 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS (6) Making copy settings Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired setting. Touch the Manual key or the key, as appropriate. Exposure mode mode of copy exposure, auto or manual. Exposure mode Perform the following procedure to select between auto exposure and manual exposure as the copy exposure mode in the initial mode. Manual - Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) Exposure mode mode of copy exposure, auto or manual. / Manual Language setting BOX check - Machine report User Adjustment / If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Machine Language setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Exposure mode in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Exposure mode screen will be displayed. 5 6 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Default menu Exposure mode Exposure steps Original image quality Eco ground exp. adj. Manual step Text + Photo Standard ting mode / Default menu Exposure mode Exposure steps Image quality original Eco ground exp. adj. Manual step Text + Photo Standard ting mode 7-6

206 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Exposure adjustment step Perform the following procedure to change the incremental step to be used during adjustment of the copy exposure. Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) / Touch the step key or the 0.5 step key, as appropriate. Exposure steps step of copy exposure. step step - Language Machine setting BOX report check User Adjustment Exposure steps adjustment step of copy exposure. step / step Language Machine setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Exposure steps in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Exposure steps screen will be displayed. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / 5 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Default menu Exposure mode Exposure steps Original image quality Eco ground exp. adj. Manual step Text + Photo Standard ting mode 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Default menu Exposure mode Exposure steps Image quality original Eco ground exp. adj. Manual step Text + Photo Standard ting mode 7-6

207 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Original quality Perform the following procedure to determine the setting that will be used for the image quality in the initial mode. Touch the Text+Photo key, the Photo key or the Text key, as appropriate. Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) Original image quality mode of original image quality. / Text + Photo Photo Text - Language setting BOX check Machine report User Adjustment Image quality original. mode of original quality. / Text+Photo Photo Text - Language setting Hard Disk check Machine report User Adjustment Original image quality [ Image quality Original ] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Original image quality [ Image quality Original ] screen will be displayed. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / 5 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Default menu Exposure mode Exposure steps Original image quality Eco ground exp. adj. Manual step Text + Photo Standard ting mode 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Default menu Exposure mode Exposure steps Image quality original Eco ground exp. adj. Manual step Text + Photo Standard ting mode 7-65

208 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Eco print mode ON/OFF Perform the following procedure to determine whether or not the eco print mode will be the setting in the initial mode. Touch the key if you want to make the eco print mode the setting in the initial mode. Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) Eco Eco. / - Language setting BOX check Machine report User Adjustment Eco Eco. / - Language Machine setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Eco in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Eco screen will be displayed. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / 5 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Default menu Exposure mode Exposure steps Original image quality Eco ground exp. adj. Manual step Text + Photo Standard ting mode 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Default menu Exposure mode Exposure steps Image quality original Eco ground exp. adj. Manual step Text + Photo Standard ting mode 7-66

209 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS ground exposure adjustment Perform the following procedure to adjust the ground color of the copied paper. Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) Touch the Lighter key or Darker key to adjust density. ground exp. adj. Able to adjust exposure of paper background. / Lighter Darker - Language setting BOX check Machine report User Adjustment ground exp. adj. Able to adjust exposure of paper background. / Lighter Darker - Language Machine setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. ground exp. adj. in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The ground exp. adj. screen will be displayed. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / 5 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Default menu Exposure mode Exposure steps Original image quality Eco ground exp. adj. Manual step Text + Photo Standard ting mode 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Default menu Exposure mode Exposure steps Image quality original Eco ground exp. adj. Manual step Text + Photo Standard ting mode 7-67

210 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Paper selection Perform the following procedure to set whether the copier will automatically select the same size of copy paper as the original once an original is set, or whether the designated drawer[cassette] will be automatically selected. Touch the APS key to have the same size of copy paper as the original selected automatically, and the Default drawer[cassette] key to have paper fed from the designated drawer[cassette]. Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) paper auto paper selection mode. / APS Default drawer - Language setting BOX check Machine report User Adjustment paper ting paper select mode. / APS Default cassette - Language Machine setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. paper in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The paper screen will be displayed. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / 5 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Default menu paper paper type(aps) Default drawer Drawer for cover paper Default magnification APS st paper Manual ting mode 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Default menu paper paper type(aps) Default cassette Cassette for cover paper Default mode APS st paper Manual ting mode 7-68

211 Paper type (auto paper selection mode) Perform the following procedure to set which types of paper can be selected under the auto paper selection mode. Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Touch the key and then touch the key that corresponds to the types of paper you want to allow to be used under the auto paper selection mode. If you do NOT want to limit the types of paper that will be available for use in that mode, touch the key. paper type(aps) paper type(s) for Paper ion. / Color High quality Custom Custom 5 Machine Language setting BOX report check User Adjustment Preprinted Recycled Letterhead - Prepunched Rough Bond Vellum Custom Custom Custom Custom 6 Custom 7 Custom 8 paper type(aps) paper type(s) for Paper ion. / Colour High quality Custom Custom 5 Language Preprinted Recycled Letterhead Prepunched Rough Bond Vellum Custom Custom Custom Custom 6 Custom 7 Custom 8 setting Hard Disk check - Machine report User Adjustment paper type(aps) in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The paper type(aps) screen will be displayed. S It is possible to select the type of paper that has been designated for the drawer[cassette] currently in use. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / paper paper type(aps) Default drawer Drawer for cover paper Default magnification Default menu APS st paper Manual ting mode 5 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. / 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. Default menu paper paper type(aps) Default cassette Cassette for cover paper Default mode APS st paper Manual ting mode 7-69

212 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Default drawer[cassette] Perform the following procedure to set one drawer[cassette] that will be selected automatically regardless of the size of paper loaded in that drawer[cassette]. * It is NOT possible to select the multi-bypass tray as the drawer[cassette]. Touch the key that corresponds to the desired drawer[cassette]. Default drawer priority drawer. st paper Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) / nd paper rd paper th paper - Language Default cassette paper cassette for setting. setting BOX check st paper Machine report User Adjustment nd paper rd paper th paper - / S Machine Language setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. The setting for drawer[cassette] No. and No. will only be available when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier. Default drawer[cassette] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Default drawer[cassette] screen will be displayed. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / 5 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Default menu paper paper type(aps) Default drawer Drawer for cover paper Default magnification APS st paper Manual ting mode 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Default menu paper paper type(aps) Default cassette Cassette for cover paper Default mode APS st paper Manual ting mode 7-70

213 Cover drawer[cassette] Perform the following procedure to set which drawer[cassette] will be used to feed the cover sheets in the cover mode, the booklet/stitching mode and the book to booklet mode. Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Touch the key that corresponds to the desired drawer[cassette]. Drawer for cover paper Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) drawer for cover paper. st paper nd paper / - rd paper th paper Language setting BOX check Cassette for cover paper Machine report User Adjustment cassette for cover paper. st paper nd paper / - rd paper th paper Machine Language setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment Drawer for cover paper [ Cassette for cover paper ] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Drawer for cover paper [ Cassette for cover paper ] screen will be displayed. S If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. The setting for drawer[cassette] No. and No. will only be available when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / 5 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Default menu paper paper type(aps) Default drawer Drawer for cover paper Default magnification APS st paper Manual ting mode 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Default menu paper paper type(aps) Default cassette Cassette for cover paper Default mode APS st paper Manual ting mode 7-7

214 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Default magnification ratio Perform the following procedure to set whether or not the appropriate magnification ratio to be calculated automatically when you select the size of copy paper. Touch the Manual key or the AMS key, as appropriate. Default magnification magnification mode. Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) Manual AMS / - Language Default mode setting BOX check zoom mode. Machine report User Adjustment Manual AMS / - Machine Language setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Default magnification [ Default mode ] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Default magnification [ Default mode ] screen will be displayed. 5 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. / 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. Default menu paper paper type(aps) Default drawer Drawer for cover paper Default magnification APS st paper Manual ting mode / Default menu paper paper type(aps) Default cassette Cassette for cover paper Default mode APS st paper Manual ting mode 7-7

215 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS exposure adjustment Perform the following procedure to adjust the overall exposure level for the auto exposure mode. Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) Touch the Lighter key or the Darker key, as appropriate, to move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the exposure as desired. Adjust auto exposure. Adjust copy exposure setting. () / Lighter Darker Language - Machine setting BOX report check User Adjustment Adjust auto exposure. Adjust setting of copy exposure. () / Lighter Darker Language - setting Hard Disk check Machine report User Adjustment Adjust auto exposure. in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Adjust auto exposure. screen will be displayed. / If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Default menu Adjust auto exposure. Adjust auto exposure. (OCR) Adj. manual expo.(mixed) Adj. manual expo.(text) Adj. manual expo.(photo) Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard ting mode 5 6 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Default menu Adjust auto exposure. Adjust auto exposure. (OCR) Adj. manual expo.(mixed) Adj. manual expo.(text) Adj. manual expo.(photo) Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard ting mode 7-7

216 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS exposure adjustment (OCR) Perform the following procedure to adjust the overall exposure level for scanning with OCR (Optical Character Recognition) software when using the optional scanner functions of this copier. Touch the Lighter key or the Darker key, as appropriate, to move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the exposure as desired. Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) Adjust auto exposure (OCR) / Lighter Darker - Language setting BOX check Machine report User Adjustment Adjust auto exposure (OCR) / Lighter Darker - Language setting Hard Disk check Machine report User Adjustment Adjust auto exposure (OCR) in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the Change # key. The Adjust auto exposure (OCR) screen will be displayed. / If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. 5 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Default menu Adjust auto exposure. Adjust auto exposure. (OCR) Adj. manual expo.(mixed) Adj. manual expo.(text) Adj. manual expo.(photo) Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard ting mode 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Default menu Adjust auto exposure. Adjust auto exposure. (OCR) Adj. manual expo.(mixed) Adj. manual expo.(text) Adj. manual expo.(photo) Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard ting mode 7-7

217 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Manual exposure adjustment (text+photo mode) Perform the following procedure to adjust the median exposure value when the text+photo mode is selected for the image quality. Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) Touch the Lighter key or the Darker key, as appropriate, to move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the exposure as desired. Adj. manual expo.(mixed) Adjust copy exposure setting.(manual, Text+Photo) / Lighter Darker Language - Machine setting BOX report check User Adjustment Adj. manual expo.(mixed) Adjust setting of copy exposure.(manual,text+photo) / Lighter Darker Language - setting Hard Disk check Machine report User Adjustment Adj. Manual expo. (Mixed) in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Adj. Manual expo. (Mixed) screen will be displayed. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / Default menu Adjust auto exposure. Adjust auto exposure. (OCR) Adj. manual expo.(mixed) Adj. manual expo.(text) Adj. manual expo.(photo) Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard ting mode 5 6 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Default menu Adjust auto exposure. Adjust auto exposure. (OCR) Adj. manual expo.(mixed) Adj. manual expo.(text) Adj. manual expo.(photo) Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard ting mode 7-75

218 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Manual exposure adjustment (text mode) Perform the following procedure to adjust the median exposure value when the text mode is selected for the image quality. Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) Touch the Lighter key or the Darker key, as appropriate, to move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the exposure as desired. Adj. manual expo. (Text) Adjust copy exposure setting. (Manual, Text) / Lighter Darker Language - Machine setting BOX report check User Adjustment Adj. manual expo. (Text) Adjust setting of copy exposure. (Manual, Text) / Lighter Darker Language - setting Hard Disk check Machine report User Adjustment Adj. manual expo. (Text) in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Adj. manual expo. (Text) screen will be displayed. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / Default menu Adjust auto exposure. Adjust auto exposure. (OCR) Adj. manual expo.(mixed) Adj. manual expo.(text) Adj. manual expo.(photo) Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard ting mode 5 6 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Default menu Adjust auto exposure. Adjust auto exposure. (OCR) Adj. manual expo.(mixed) Adj. manual expo.(text) Adj. manual expo.(photo) Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard ting mode 7-76

219 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Manual exposure adjustment (photo mode) Perform the following procedure to adjust the median exposure value when the photo mode is selected for the image quality. Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) Touch the Lighter key or the Darker key, as appropriate, to move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the exposure as desired. Adj. manual expo. (Photo) Adjust copy exposure setting. (Manual, Photo) / Lighter Darker Language - Machine setting BOX report check User Adjustment Adj. manual expo. (Photo) Adjust setting of copy exposure. (Manual, Photo) / Lighter Darker Language - setting Hard Disk check Machine report User Adjustment Adj. manual expo. (Photo) in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Adj. manual expo. (Photo) screen will be displayed. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / Default menu Adjust auto exposure. Adjust auto exposure. (OCR) Adj. manual expo.(mixed) Adj. manual expo.(text) Adj. manual expo.(photo) Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard ting mode 5 6 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Default menu Adjust auto exposure. Adjust auto exposure. (OCR) Adj. manual expo.(mixed) Adj. manual expo.(text) Adj. manual expo.(photo) Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard ting mode 7-77

220 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Sort/Finished mode ON/OFF Perform the following procedure to determine whether or not the Sort and/or the Finished modes will be the setting in the initial mode. Touch the Sort: key under Sort if you want to make the Sort mode the setting in the initial mode. Sort mode for sort, ON or OFF. Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) Sort Sort : Sort : set / - Language Sort Machine setting BOX report check User Adjustment mode of sort, ON or OFF. Sort Group Sort : Sort : set / Machine Language setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment - Touch the [ set ] key under set [ Group ] if you want to make the Finished mode the setting in the initial mode. In metric specification copiers, if you select Sort: under Sort, the set key that appears under Group will change to the Output each page key. Sort in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Sort screen will be displayed. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / Default menu Sort Rotation Default margin width Default erase width Preset limit ting mode Sort : / set : Rotate Left /" 0" Border /" Center /" Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. / 7 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. Default menu Sort Rotation Default margin width Default erase width Preset limit ting mode Sort : / Group : Rotate Left 6mm 0mm Border 6mm Center mm

221 Rotation mode ON/OFF Perform the following procedure to determine whether or not the Rotation mode will be the setting in the initial mode. Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Touch the Rotate key if you want to make the Rotation mode the setting in the initial mode. Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) Rotation mode for Rotation, ON or OFF. No Rotate / Rotate - Language setting BOX check Machine report User Adjustment Rotation mode of Rotation, ON or OFF. / No rotate Rotate - Language Machine setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Rotation in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Rotation screen will be displayed. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / 5 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Default menu Sort Rotation Default margin width Default erase width Preset limit ting mode Sort : / set : Rotate Left /" 0" Border /" Center /" Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Default menu Sort Rotation Default margin width Default erase width Preset limit ting mode Sort : / Group : Rotate Left 6mm 0mm Border 6mm Center mm

222 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Margin width Perform the following procedure to determine the value of the location and width of the margins in the margin mode. Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) / Touch the O key or the P key, and the M key or the N key, as desired, to change the margins and margin widths to the desired setting. Default margin width Adjust setting of margin width. Front page (0~ /) Left " / (0~ /) 0 " Language - Machine setting BOX report check User Adjustment Default margin width Adjust setting of margin width. Front page (0~8) 0 mm / Left (0~8) 6 mm Language - setting Hard Disk check Machine report User Adjustment Default margin width in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Default margin width screen will be displayed. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / Default menu Sort Rotation Default margin width Default erase width Preset limit ting mode Sort : / set : Rotate Left /" 0" Border /" Center /" Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Default menu Sort Rotation Default margin width Default erase width Preset limit ting mode Sort : / Group : Rotate Left 6mm 0mm Border 6mm Center mm

223 Erased border width Perform the following procedure to determine the value for the width of the border to be erased in the two border erase modes. Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) / Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Touch the + key or the - key under the Border and Center fields to change the displayed widths to those desired. Default erase width Adjust setting of erase width. (0~ /) (0~ /) Border / " Center / " + + Language - Machine setting BOX report check User Adjustment Default erase width Adjust setting of erase width. / (0~8) (0~6) Border 6 mm Center + + mm Language - setting Hard Disk check Machine report User Adjustment Default erase width in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Default erase width screen will be displayed. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / Default menu Sort Rotation Default margin width Default erase width Preset limit ting mode Sort : / set : Rotate Left /" 0" Border /" Center /" Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Default menu Sort Rotation Default margin width Default erase width Preset limit ting mode Sort : / Group : Rotate Left 6mm 0mm Border 6mm Center mm

224 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS limit Perform the following procedure to set the limit for the number of copies (or copy sets) that can be made at a time. Touch the + key or the - key to change the copy limit to the desired setting. Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) Preset limit output quantity. ~ + / - Language setting BOX check Machine report User Adjustment Preset limit copy preset in one job (# key). ~ / - Language Machine setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Preset limit in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Preset limit screen will be displayed. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / 5 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Default menu Sort Rotation Default margin width Default erase width Preset limit ting mode Sort : / set : Rotate Left /" 0" Border /" Center /" Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Default menu Sort Rotation Default margin width Default erase width Preset limit ting mode Sort : / Group : Rotate Left 6mm 0mm Border 6mm Center mm

225 Repeat copying ON/OFF Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to prohibit repeat copying, as well as whether or not to make repeat copying the setting in the initial mode. Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS If you want to prohibit repeat copying, touch the key. If you want to make repeat copying the setting in the initial mode, touch the key. This setting is displayed when the optional Hard Disk is installed. Modify ON to activate Modify or OFF to inactivate it. Function Default Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) / - Modify copy ON to activate Modify or OFF to inactivate it. Function Default Language setting BOX check Machine report User Adjustment - / Language If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. setting Hard Disk check Machine report User Adjustment Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Modify in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Modify screen will be displayed. 5 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. / 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. Default menu Preset limit Modify Display register key Customize(Main function) Customize(Add function) ting mode 999 / Default / Default menu Preset limit Modify copy Display""key Customize(Main function) Customize(Add function) ting mode 999 / Default 7-8

226 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Registration keys ON/OFF Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to allow a key to be displayed in the screen for those function and modes which can be registered under the registration keys. Functions and/or modes can only be registered under registration keys through the key. If you want the key to be displayed, touch the key. If you do NOT want it to be displayed, touch the key. Display register key e touch key /. Able to use key on each screen. Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) / - Language Display""key setting BOX check to show key /. Able to use key to register/delete at each page. Machine report User Adjustment / - Machine Language setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Display register key [ Display "" key ] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Display register key [ Display "" key ] screen will be displayed. 5 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. / 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. Default menu Preset limit Modify Display register key Customize(Main function) Customize(Add function) ting mode 999 / Default / Default menu Preset limit Modify copy Display""key Customize(Main function) Customize(Add function) ting mode 999 / Default 7-8

227 Customize screen layout (Main functions) Perform the following procedure to change the order of the main functions and modes that are displayed in the Basic and the User choice tabs in order to make the display more appropriate to the way you use the copier. Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS If you want to change the order of the basic functions and modes, touch the or the cursor key to select the item you want to move. Then touch the Move ahead key or the Move behind [ Move backward ] key to move that item and change the order of display. The final display of the basic functions and modes will be in accordance with the numbers in the list and those shown in the tabs to the left of that list. Customize(Main function) / Language Basic User choice mode Exposure Mode Reduce/Enlarge Sort/Finished / sided Original size Orig. quality Move Ahead Move Behind Machine setting BOX report check User Adjustment - / Language Customize(Main function) Basic User choice mode Exposure Mode Reduce/Enlarge Sort/Finished / sided Original size Quality orig Move ahead Move backward setting Hard Disk check - Machine report User Adjustment Customize(Main function) in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Customize(Main function) screen will be displayed. / Default menu Preset limit Modify Display register key Customize(Main function) Customize(Add function) ting mode 999 / Default / If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. 5 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. Default menu Preset limit Modify copy Display""key Customize(Main function) Customize(Add function) ting mode 999 / Default 7-85

228 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Customize screen layout (Add functions) Perform the following procedure to add often-used functions and/or modes, or to change the order of their layout, in order to make the display more appropriate to the way you use the copier. Display the screen. (See (5) Accessing the copy settings on page 7-6.) / Language setting BOX check If you want to add functions and/or modes to the User choice tab, touch the or the cursor key under the list on the right to select the item you want to add. Then touch the or the cursor key under the list on the left to select in what order you want it to be added in that tab. Finally, touch the b key to add the selected item to the User choice tab. Customize(Add function) Basic User choice mode Margin Border Erase Combine None None None None paper Combine ion Batch scanning Margin Addition mode Machine report User Adjustment - Customize(Add function) / Language setting Hard Disk check Basic User choice mode Margin Erace Merge None None None Addition Mode None paper Merge selection Batch scanning Margin Machine report User Adjustment - Customize(Add function) in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The Customize(Add function) screen will be displayed. If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Default menu Preset limit Modify Display register key Customize(Main function) Customize(Add function) ting mode 999 / Default 5 6 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. / Default menu Preset limit Modify copy Display""key Customize(Main function) Customize(Add function) ting mode 999 / Default 7-86

229 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS. Multi-bypass tray paper settings () and type Perform the following procedure in order to use the multi-bypass tray to feed copy paper. With the content of the Basic tab displayed, press the [Default ting/] key. The screen will be displayed. Touch the + key or the - key to change each of the displayed sizes (length and width) to the desired settings. * In metric specification copiers, the desired sizes can also be entered directly by touching the corresponding #-Keys key and then using the keypad. / 97xmm setting ( 7 /8~ 5 /8) (5 7 /8~7) Y /6 " X 6 9 /6 " Detection Input size Others Standard + + # keys # keys Paper type paper type / Touch the setting key. The setting screen will be displayed. / setting (98~97) (8~) Y 97 mm X 0 mm Detection Input size Others Standard + + #-Keys #-Keys Paper type paper type Machine Language setting BOX report check User Adjustment 5 Designate the paper type by pressing the paper type key or the key, as desired. If you pressed the paper type key, proceed to the next step. If you pressed the key, proceed directly to step 7. / / setting A Unit Paper type Machine Language setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment Detection Input size Others Standard Centimeter Inch paper type Specify the desired method of selecting the paper size. If you select Detection here, select the desired unit of measure ( Centimeter or Inch ) as well, and then go directly to step 5. If you want to select a custom paper size, touch the Input size and then go to the next step. / setting Unit Paper type Detection Input size Centimeter Inch paper type / A Others Standard setting Unit Paper type Detection Centimeter paper type Input size Inch Others Standard / setting Unit Paper type Detection Centimeter paper type Input size Inch Others Standard 7-87

230 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS If you selected, the designated paper type will be automatically changed in accordance with the selected paper size. OUFUKU HAGAKI Paper type Cardstock () ing other standard sizes Perform the following procedure when you want to print out onto other standard sizes of special paper. With the content of the Basic tab displayed, press the [/] key. The screen will be displayed. Envelope size (ISO B5, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C, Comm.#0, Comm.#9, Comm.#6-/, MO, YOUKEI, YOUKEI ) Other sizes Envelope 6 Touch the key that corresponds to the type of paper to be used, and then touch the key. Touch the setting key. The setting screen will be displayed. / paper type / Transparency Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick paper Envelope High quality Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom 5 Custom 6 Custom 7 Custom 8 Machine Language setting BOX report check User Adjustment / paper type Transparency Rough Labels Recycled Preprinted Cardstock Colour Prepunched Thick paper Envelope Custom Custom Custom Custom 5 Custom 6 Custom 7 / Language Vellum Bond Letterhead High quality Custom Custom 8 setting Hard Disk check Machine report User Adjustment IMPORTANT! BE ABSOLUTELY certain to select the paper type that corresponds to the paper that is to be used. If the paper being used and the select paper type differ, problems may occur in regard to the quality of the copies. Touch the Others Standard key. / A setting 7 Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. Unit Paper type Detection Input size Centimeter Inch paper type Others Standard / setting Unit Paper type Detection Centimeter paper type Input size Inch Others Standard 7-88

231 Touch the size key. The size screen will be displayed. / setting Paper Size ISO B5 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS If you selected, the designated paper type will be automatically changed in accordance with the selected paper size. Paper type Detection Input size Others Standard EX size Paper type paper type OUFUKU HAGAKI Envelope size (ISO B5, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C, Comm.#0, Comm.#9, Comm.#6-/, MO, YOUKEI, YOUKEI ) Cardstock Envelope / Other sizes setting Paper type Detection EX size paper type 5 Input size Others Standard Touch the key that corresponds to the size of paper you want to use, and then touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. 7 Touch the key that corresponds to the type of paper to be used, and then touch the key. / paper type / size Transparency Rough Labels Recycled Preprinted Cardstock Color Prepunched Thick paper Envelope Custom Custom Custom Custom 5 Custom 6 Custom 7 ISO B5 Comm.#0 EX 8 /x" Vellum Bond Letterhead High quality Custom Custom 8 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C Comm.#9 Comm. #6-/ MO OUFUKU HAGAKI YOUKEI YOUKEI 8 K 6 K / 6 / size ISO B5 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C Comm.#0 Comm.#9 Comm. #6-/ MO EX OUFUKU HAGAKI YOUKEI YOUKEI 8 /x" 8 K 6 K Designate the paper type by pressing the paper type key or the key, as desired. If you pressed the paper type key, proceed to the next step. If you pressed the key, proceed directly to step 8. IMPORTANT! paper type Transparency Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Colour Prepunched Letterhead Thick paper Envelope High quality Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom 5 Custom 6 Custom 7 Custom 8 BE ABSOLUTELY certain to select the paper type that corresponds to the paper that is to be used. If the paper being used and the select paper type differ, problems may occur in regard to the quality of the copies. / setting Paper Size ISO B5 Paper type 8 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. Detection EX size paper type Input size Others Standard / setting Paper type Detection EX size paper type Input size Others Standard 7-89

232 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS. Original size registration Perform the following procedure in order to register a custom original size that can be used under the Original size selection procedure. With the content of the Basic tab displayed, press the [Default ting/] key. The screen will be displayed. of the Original size (custom ) to Original size (custom ) settings under the Default menu column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the key. The corresponding setting screen will be displayed. / Default menu ting mode Original size (custom ) Original size (custom ) Original size (custom ) Original size (custom ) x" x" x" x" / Touch the key. The screen will be displayed. Default menu Original size (custom ) Original size (custom ) Original size (custom ) Original size (custom ) 50x50mm 50x50mm 50x50mm 50x50mm ting mode / Machine Language setting BOX report check User Adjustment Touch the + key or the - key to change each of the displayed sizes (Y = width and X = length) to the desired settings. If you do not want to register a custom original size, touch the key. / Original size (custom ) custom size original. (~ 5 /8) (~7) " " Language setting Hard Disk check Machine report User Adjustment - Original size (custom ) custom size original. (50~97) (50~) 50 mm 50 mm Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. 7-90

233 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 5. Drum refresh Perform the following procedure if the copy image becomes blurred or if white spots which are not on the originals appear on the copies. The drum refreshing operation will take approximately 5 minutes. " x 8 /", " x 7", A or A size paper on the multibypass tray. Touch the Drum refresh key. The Drum refresh screen will be displayed. / User adjustment With the content of the Basic tab displayed, press the [Default ting/] key. The screen will be displayed. Drum refresh / User adjustment Drum refresh Touch the User adjustment key. / Language setting BOX check Machine report User Adjustment / Language setting Hard Disk check Machine report User Adjustment 7-9

234 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 5 Touch the key. The drum refreshing process will begin. Drum refresh Refresh the drum when image blur or white dots appear on the image. - User adjustment Drum refresh Refresh the drum when image blur or white dots appear on the image. - User adjustment The Now drum refreshing. message will appear and the paper is fed from the multi-bypass tray to execute drum refreshing. Now drum refreshing. Orig. page Count/ Output sided Rear x8 /" sided Sort Inner tray Now drum refreshing. Original Count/ Output sided Rtop / rear A -sided Sort Inner tray To cancel drum refreshing, press the [Stop/Clear] key. When drum refreshing completes after ejecting the paper, the touch panel will return to the Drum refresh screen Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. 7-9

235 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 6. Checking the total counter and printing out the counter report Perform this procedure when you want to check, on the touch panel, the total count of copies, etc., made on this machine as a whole. You can also print out the information as a counter report. The total number of copies and printouts made will be displayed. If you want to print out a counter report, touch the report key. S You can also check the total number of printouts made under each of the optional printer, scanner a fax functions. You can additionally check the number of originals scanned on this machine. check Number print. Black & White: er Fax Total, ,07 Num. of pages Original: scanner Fax Total report With the content of the Basic tab displayed, press the [Default ting/] key. The screen will be displayed. check Number print. Black & White: er Fax Total, ,07 Num. of pages Original: scanner Fax Total report Make sure there is " x 8 /" [A] size paper loaded in one of the drawers[cassettes] when you print out the counter report. Touch the check key. The check screen will be displayed. ce you are finished checking the counts, touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. / check Language setting BOX check Number print. Black & White: er Fax Total, ,07 Machine report User Adjustment Num. of pages Original: scanner Fax Total report / check Language setting Hard Disk check Number print. Black & White: er Fax Total, ,07 Machine report User Adjustment Num. of pages Original: scanner Fax Total report 5 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. 7-9

236 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 7. Box management settings Perform the following settings in order to manage the boxes that are used under the document management functions. This setting is displayed when the optional Hard Disk is installed. () Box settings ting list print out Reset box Box name & password / Clear data in box save time Description This procedure will allow you to print out a list of all of the images stored in the box for the form overlay mode, of the documents stored in the shared data box or of the documents stored in the synergy print boxes. This procedure will delete all of the image data that is stored in the Form box, as well as the documents stored in the shared data box and the synergy print boxes. Make absolutely certain that you do not need the corresponding data before you attempt to delete it. This procedure will allow you to change the name and password for any one of the synergy print boxes as well as delete at one time all of the data registered in any one box. If you register a password for any of these boxes, you will need to enter the registered password in order to print out or delete any documents that are stored win that box. This procedure will allow you to select the length of time that will elapse before each job in a synergy print box is automatically deleted. this time to any number of days between and 7. * This setting cannot be made independently for each box. Reference page () Accessing the box management settings Perform the following procedure when you want to access the screen for each of the various box management settings. With the content of the Basic tab displayed, press the [Default ting/] key. The / screen will be displayed. Touch the key. / Machine Language setting BOX report check User Adjustment / Language setting Hard Disk check Machine report User Adjustment 7-9

237 Use the keypad to enter the -digit management code. The factory setting for 0 cpm copiers is 000, for 0 cpm copiers is 000 and for 50 cpm copiers is If the entered code matched the registered one, the screen will be displayed. Enter the administrator number Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS () Making box management settings Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired setting. list print out Touch the the list key under the box ( Form Box, Shared Data Box or Synergy Box ) for which you want to print out the document list. Enter the administrator number Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box the list Reset Box the list Reset Box Box editing save term the list Reset Box management management Touch the key that corresponds to the desired box management setting. Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box the list Reset Box the list Reset Box Box editing save term the list Reset Box Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box the list Reset Box the list Reset Box Box editing saving the list Reset Box A document list will be printed out for that box. once print out is completed, the touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. management management Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box the list the list Box editing the list Reset Box Reset Box saving Reset Box S It is possible for you to change the -digit management code. (See Changing the management code on page 7-56.) Refer to the desired procedure(s) explained under () Making box management settings and perform the corresponding setting(s). 7-95

238 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Reset box Box name & password / Clear data in box Touch the Reset Box key under the box ( Form Box, Shared Data Box or Synergy Box ) that you want to delete all data for. A verification screen will be displayed. Touch the Box editing key under Synergy Box. The Box editing screen will be displayed. Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box the list Reset Box the list Reset Box Box editing save term the list Reset Box the list Reset Box the list Reset Box Box editing save term the list Reset Box management management management Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box management Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box the list Reset Box the list Reset Box Box editing saving the list Reset Box Touch the Yes key or the No key, as appropriate. the list Reset Box the list Reset Box Box editing saving the list Reset Box Either touch the synergy print box that contains the information to be modified, or enter its number using the keypad. Then touch the Enter key. Stop Box editing Cancel Shared Data Box box No. 00 ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ EFGH_ ABCD_ MNOP_ QRST_00005 Box No. (with #key) Reset this Box. Do you really want to reset? EFGH_ ABCD_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_ UVWX_ ABCD_05000 Yes No 005 QRST_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_05000 / 5 Enter - management Stop Box editing Job cancel Shared Data Box box No. 00 ABCD_ UVWX_ QRST_ MNOP_ EFGH_ ABCD_ QRST_00005 Box No. (With # key) Reset this box. Do you really want to reset? EFGH_ ABCD_ UVWX_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_ ABCD_05000 Yes No 005 QRST_ MNOP_ IJKL_ EFGH_05000 /5 Enter - management If you selected Yes, all the data in the selected box will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step. If you selected No, the touch panel will return to the screen in step without deleting any data. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen.touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. 7-96

239 If you want to change the name of that box, first select Box name and then touch the key. Enter the new name as desired. Box007 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 6 7 If you want to delete all of the data in that box, select Reset Box. A verification screen will be displayed. Touch the Yes key or the No key, as appropriate. Stop Box name Password Default menu ting mode ABCD_00000 (No register) Reset Box Box No. : Box name : 007 ABCD_00000 Reset this Box. Do you really want to reset? - - Box editing Yes No Box 007 Stop Box name Password Default menu ting mode ABCD_00000 (No register) Reset Box Box No. : Box name : 007 ABCD_00000 Reset this Box. Do you really want to reset? - management - Box editing Yes No Refer to. Entering characters on page 7-0 for information on entering characters. 5 If you want to change the name of that box, first select Password and then touch the key. The Password screen will be displayed. Use the keypad to enter the new password for that box and then touch the key. The new password will be registered and the touch panel will return to the screen in step. 8 9 If you selected Yes, all the data in the selected box will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step. If you selected No, the touch panel will return to the screen in step without deleting any data. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen.touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. Password Enter new password. Password (Enter by #key) Clear - - Box editings Password Enter new password. Password (Enter #-key) Clear Default settund - management - Box editing S The password can be between and 8 digits long. If you decide not to register a password for that box, touch the Clear key and then, with nothing entered in the password field, touch the key. 7-97

240 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS save time Touch the save term [ saving ] key under Synergy Box. The data saving term [ data save period ] screen will be displayed. Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box the list the list Box editing the list Reset Box Reset Box save term Reset Box management management Shared Data Box Synergy Box Form box the list the list Box editing the list Reset Box Reset Box saving Reset Box Touch the save term [ save period ] key and then touch + key or the - key to change the displayed save time to the desired setting. data saving term saving term for documents in synergy print box. save term No time limit (~7) + 7 Days - data save period save period for documents in synergy print box. save period No time limit (~7) 7 + Days Default ting - management S The save time can be set to any number of days between and 7. The factory setting is for 7 Days. If you want the data to be saved indefinitely, touch the No time limit key to highlight it. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key once again. The touch panel will return to the screen.touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. 7-98

241 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 8. Hard disk management Perform the following procedure to access the HDD management mode screen and check available space and/or delete any invalid data on the optional Hard Disk. With the content of the Basic tab displayed, press the [/] key. The screen will be displayed. Use the keypad to enter the -digit management code. The factory setting for 0 cpm copiers is 000, for 0 cpm copiers is 000 and for 50 cpm copiers is If the entered code matched the registered one, the HDD mode [ HDD ] screen will be displayed. Enter the administrator number Enter the administrator number Touch the BOX [ Hard Disk ] key. / Machine Language setting BOX report check User Adjustment Touch the key under Check HDD capacity (left side of the touch panel). The overall size of the hard disk, as well as the currently available space, will be displayed. If you want to delete any invalid data, go to the next step. If you are finished with this procedure, go directly to step 6. / HDD management mode HDD management mode Language Check HDD capacity Able to check the free space and capacity of HDD. Delete invalid data Delete invalid deta from the HDD. Machine setting Hard Disk report check User Adjustment HDD management mode HDD management Check HDD capacity Able to check the free space and capacity of HDD. Delete invalid data Delete invalid deta from the HDD. 7-99

242 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 5 Touch the key under Delete invalid data (right side of the touch panel). The operation to delete invalid data will start. HDD management mode HDD management mode Item Free Space Capacity ting mode 8, 569 MB 9, 09 MB Delete invalid data. Delete invalid deta from the HDD. HDD management mode HDD management Item Free space Capacity ting mode 8, 569 MB 9, 09 MB Delete invalid data. Delete invalid deta from the HDD. 6 Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step.touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. 7-00

243 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 9. Report print out Perform the following procedure to print out one of the following reports. < report > Lists all of the values for the copy settings. < Machine report > Lists all of the values for the machine settings. < Toner coverage report> Lists the average toner density (black ratio) for each size of copy paper used under each of the copy, printer and fax functions of this machine. Use the keypad to enter the -digit management code. The factory setting for 0 cpm copiers is 000, for 0 cpm copiers is 000 and for 50 cpm copiers is Enter the administrator number Make sure that " x 8 /" [A] size paper is loaded in one of the drawers[cassettes]. Enter the administrator number With the content of the Basic tab displayed, press the [Default ting/] key. The screen will be displayed. It is possible for you to change the -digit management code. (See Changing the management code on page 7-56.) ce the report menu screen is displayed, touch the report key, the Machine report key or the Toner coverage key, as appropriate. Touch the report key. report report menu / report Toner coverage Machine report Language setting BOX check Machine report User Adjustment report report menu / report Machine report Toner coverage Language setting Hard Disk check Machine report User Adjustment 7-0

244 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 5 The ing report screen will be displayed and printing of the corresponding report will start. ing report. Orig. page Count/ Output Cancel x8 /" sided Sort Inner tray Cancel ing report. Original Count/set Output -sided Sort Inner tray Cancel If you want to cancel print out of the corresponding report, touch the Cancel key. 6 7 When the report is complete, the touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step. Touch the key. The touch panel will return to the contents of the Basic tab. 7-0

245 0. Changing the language used for messages You can select the language that will be used on the touch panel. The available languages are as follows: Inch specification copiers: English, French ( Français ), Spanish ( Español ) and Japanese ( ) Metric specification copiers: English, German ( DEUTSCH ), French ( FRANÇAIS ), Italian ( ITALIANO ) and Spanish ( ESPAÑOL ) With the content of the Basic tab displayed, press the [Default ting/] key. The / screen will be displayed. Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Touch the key that corresponds to the language that you want to use. The language used on the touch panel will change to that selected. Language English Français Español Stop Language Stop English Deutsch Français Español Italiano Touch the Language key. The Language screen will be displayed. / Language setting BOX check Machine report User Adjustment / Language setting Hard Disk check Machine report User Adjustment 7-0

246 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS. Entering characters Use the following screens to enter characters when registering names for programs and for departments, etc. Capital keyboard Name to display Stop () Character input screens A Limit:6 letters including # AllDel. Del. prev Letter keyboard # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + - Q W E R T Y U I O P { } l A S D F G H J K L : " Z X C V B N M < >? Capital Letter Num./Sym. Space Name to display Stop Numeral/Symbol keyboard A Limit:6 letters including # AllDel = ` Del. prev Name to display A Limit:6 letters including # AllDel. Stop Del. prev q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ ! " # $ % a s d f g h j k l ; z x c v b n m,. / ' & ' ( ) * +, -. / : ; [ \ ] ^ _ ' { l } ~ = > Capital Letter Num./Sym. Space Capital Letter Num./Sym. Space 5 Entry field Displays entered information. Capital key Touch this key when you want to enter uppercase letters. Letter key Touch this key when you want to enter lowercase letters. Num. /Sym. key Touch this key when you want to enter numerals and symbols. 5 Space key Touch this key when you want to enter a space. 6 AllDel. key Touch this key when you want to delete all characters that have been entered to this point. 7 r and R keys Touch these keys when you want to move the cursor. 8 Del. prev key Touch this key when you want to delete the character to the left of the cursor. 9 Stop key Touch this key when you want to cancel character input and return to the previous screen. 0 key Touch this key when you want to register the entered information. 7-0

247 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Capital keyboard Letter keyboard Name to display Stop ! A Limit:6 letters including # AllDel. Del. # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + ~ Name to display Stop Q W E R T Y U I O P { } l ` A Limit: 6 letters inc. # key AllDel. Del. prev A S D F G H J K L : Z X C V B N M < >? " = ` Capital Letter Symbol Symbol Space q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ ` a s d f g h j k l ; z x c v b n m,. / ' Symbol keyboard Capital Letter Symbol Symbol Space Name to display Stop 5 6 A Limit:6 letters including # AllDel. Del. prev Entry field Displays entered information. Capital key Touch this key when you want to enter uppercase letters. Letter key Touch this key when you want to enter lowercase letters. Symbol key Touch this key when you want to enter certain symbols. 5 Symbol key Touch this key when you want to enter certain symbols. 6 Space key Touch this key when you want to enter a space. 7 AllDel. key Touch this key when you want to delete all characters that have been entered to this point. 8 r and R keys Touch these keys when you want to move the cursor. 9 Del. prev key Touch this key when you want to delete the character to the left of the cursor. 0 Stop key Touch this key when you want to cancel character input and return to the previous screen.! key Touch this key when you want to register the entered information. Symbol keyboard Capital Letter Symbol Symbol Space Name to display A Limit:6 letters including # AllDel. Capital Letter Symbol Symbol Space Stop Del. prev 7-05

248 Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS () Character input procedure [Example] Abcde Touch the b, c, d and e keys, in that order, on the keyboard. Touch the Capital key. The Capital will be displayed. Touch the A key on the keyboard. Name to display Abcde Limit:6 letters including # AllDel = ` q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ a s d f g h j k l ; ' Stop Del. prev Name to display Stop z x c v b n m,. / Limit:6 letters including # AllDel. Del. prev Capital Letter Num./Sym. # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + - Q W E R T Y U I O P { } l A S D F G H J K L : Z X C V B N M < >? Capital Letter Num./Sym. Space " Name to display Abcde Limit: 6 letters inc. # key AllDel. Stop Del. prev = ` q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ a s d f g h j k l ; ' ` Name to display Stop z x c v b n m,. / Limit:6 letters including # Capital Letter Symbol Symbol Space AllDel. Del. # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + - Q W E R T Y U I O P { } l A S D F G H J K L : " ` ce you have finished entering the information, touch the key. Z X C V B N M < >? Capital Letter Symbol Symbol Space Touch the Letter key. Name to display Stop Abcde Limit:6 letters including # AllDel = ` q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ Del. prev Name to display Stop a s d f g h j k l ; ' A Limit:6 letters including # AllDel. Del. prev z x c v b n m,. / Capital Letter Num./Sym. # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + - Q W E R T Y U I O P { } l A S D F G H J K L : " Z X C V B N M < >? Name to display Stop Capital Letter Num./Sym. Space Abcde Limit: 6 letters inc. # key AllDel. Del. prev = ` q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ ` Name to display Stop a s d f g h j k l ; ' A Limit:6 letters including # AllDel. Del. prev z x c v b n m,. / Capital Letter Symbol Symbol # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + ~ Q W E R T Y U I O P { } l ` A S D F G H J K L : " Z X C V B N M < >? Capital Letter Symbol Symbol Space 7-06